JP2023034942A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine for performing a lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to setting information by referring to the setting information at the time of the lottery according to the entry of a game ball can execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions on the basis of the setting information, and includes a plurality of setting suggestion performance states with mutually different settings related to the setting suggestion performance. The setting suggestion performance is executed on the basis of one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states, and the plurality of setting suggestion performance states are shifted depending on the satisfaction of a specific condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of stepwise setting of the lottery probability of a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball into a starting hole.

In such a gaming machine, if it is possible to guess the setting of the lottery probability, it is advantageous for the player. .

JP 2021-078820 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
The plurality of setting-suggestion rendering states transition when a specific condition is established,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
The plurality of setting-suggestion effect states are different from each other in at least one of the setting-suggestion effect execution frequency and the setting-suggestion effect reliability.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 3]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 2,
In the setting suggestion production state,
a setting normal state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low;
a setting high certainty state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high;
contains four states of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 3,
capable of displaying a background image suggesting the setting suggesting production state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4,
capable of displaying an icon image suggesting the setting suggestion rendering state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 5,
It is possible to display a production pattern in a manner suggesting the setting suggestion production state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 6,
Capable of outputting music suggesting the setting suggestion production state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a big-hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing of a jackpot classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a non-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table at the time of a time saving state. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the state of the setting suggestion effect; 4 is a flowchart of state transition processing; 10 is a flowchart of setting suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion rendering table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect A of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect B of a setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect C of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect D of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect E of a setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect F of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect G of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect H of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect I of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect J of a setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect K of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state change effect L of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect M of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect N of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect O of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect P of a setting suggestion effect; FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 41; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect Q of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect R of a setting suggestion effect; FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 44; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect S of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect T of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect U of setting suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a state change effect V of setting suggestion effect;

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 , a select button 68 and a frame movable body 600 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is a sword-shaped operation unit, and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like. The select button 68 is a so-called cross key and is composed of a left button, a right button, an up button, and a down button, and enables various inputs. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 . The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a retracted state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it protrudes upward from the front frame 53 .

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28 , a big prize winning device (attacker) 31 , a general prize winning port 27 (normal prize winning port 27 ), an out port 16 and indicators 40 .

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 .

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a pending digested image display region in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9C. Furthermore, strictly speaking, the pending digest image 9C does not indicate pending, so it is also called the variation image 9C or the variation icon 9C.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect". In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect. Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the suspended digested image 9C, the first special figure suspension or the second special figure suspension It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later).

Below the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-like member can move up and down. The first movable accessory 14 normally rests at the retracted position (FIG. 1) below the image display device 7, and can move (advance) upward from the retracted position and rest at the advanced position. . The first movable accessory 14 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. - 特許庁A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the big winning device (attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) and the hit determination.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The big winning device (attacker, special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a big winning port (special winning port) 30 . The big winning opening 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a big winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the big winning opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The big winning hole sensor 30 a ( FIG. 3 ) detects the winning of a game ball into the big winning hole 30 . The big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the big winning device 31 .

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning the second starting opening 21 and the big winning opening 30 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the big prize opening 30 is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). A special game (jackpot game) is performed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of special symbols (losing symbols) of the losing stop mode. The opening pattern of the big winning opening 30 in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 84e (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area (not shown) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21, It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area (not shown) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 84e, and the upper limit in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area. It has become. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 84e is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 with an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 84f (Fig. 5) as the normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 84f, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 84f is extinguished when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start sensor 20a, the second start sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the special prize sensor 30a, the normal prize sensor 27a, and the discharge sensor 25. exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24 and the big winning opening solenoid 33 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the big winning hole 30 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The ejection sensor 25 is provided at the most downstream side of the game board 2 and detects all game balls launched into the game area 3 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

An external terminal board 70 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80, for the external terminal plate 70, the winning ball information, the opening information of the door or frame, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start port 20, the second start port 21 It outputs a winning game ball, whether or not a jackpot is in progress, a security signal, and the like.

A setting change device 71 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The setting change device 71 allows the jackpot probability of the gaming machine to be set in a maximum of six stages.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. It includes a CPU 92 and an RTC 95 that enables timekeeping. The RTC 95 is backed up by a primary or secondary battery (not shown). Therefore, the RTC 95 continues clocking even when the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The real-time clock 95 (hereinafter referred to as "RTC 95") has an internal RAM that holds calendar information specifying the date, time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, day of the week information specifying the day of the week, and the like. The RTC 95 is supplied with control power and backup power for the internal RAM from a button battery provided on the sub-control board 90 , and is independent of the power supplied to the sub-control board 90 . Therefore, even if the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the RTC 95 updates and retains calendar information, time information, day of the week information, etc. by supplying control power from the button battery and backup power for the built-in RAM. ing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the RTC 95 supplies the power supplied to the sub-control board 90 as a control power source and a backup power source for the built-in RAM. Alternatively, the circuit may be configured such that a control power source and a backup power source for the built-in RAM are supplied from a button type battery provided on the sub-control board 90 .

In addition to calendar information, time information, and day of the week information, the built-in RAM also contains state change effect permission information indicating whether or not to perform the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, and the start of the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect Termination information is also retained. The start/end information includes time period information from the start to the end of the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, information on the number of days elapsed since the introduction of the game machine 1 to perform the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect based on the number of days since introduction, and specific day of the week. There are specific day information for performing a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, specific day information for performing a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect on a specific day (specific date), and the like.

The state change effect permission information and the start/end information indicate that the game machine 1 is turned on and the waiting screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without starting the game. state or a state in which each effect pattern is stopped and displayed), a game hall clerk or the like operates the effect button 63 or the select button 68, first displays the setting screen on the display screen 7a, and then follows the contents of the setting screen. Then, by operating the effect button 63 or the select button 68 again, the setting is made.

For example, when the game hall clerk or the like sets not to perform the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, the select button 68 is operated and selected so that the state change effect permission information becomes "OFF". By operating the production button 63, the setting is confirmed and the setting is completed. On the other hand, in the case of setting to perform the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, the select button 68 is operated to select "ON" in the state change effect permission information, and the effect button 63 is operated. Confirm by doing.

Then, when the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is set to be performed, the process proceeds to the start/end information setting screen for setting the start/end information on the setting screen. In this start/end information setting screen, by operating the select button 68 and the production button 63 when setting the time period from the start to the end of the state change production of the setting suggestion production, a single time zone or Time zone information can be set by setting a plurality of time zones, and when setting the number of days elapsed since the introduction of the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, a single operation can be performed by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63. or a plurality of elapsed introduction days can be set to set the information on the number of elapsed introduction days. You can set a single specific day of the week or multiple specific days of the week by operating the select button to set the specific day information. By operating 68 and effect button 63, it is possible to set a single specific date (specific date) or a plurality of specific dates (specific dates) to set specific date information.

As a time zone, for example, a single time zone such as "18:00 to 22:00", "10:00 to 10:05", "10:20 to 10:25" , etc. can be set. For example, the number of days that the gaming machine 1 has been introduced to the gaming hall may be set to a single number of days elapsed since introduction, such as "5 days," or "5 days," "10 days," "15 days," and so on. It is possible to set a plurality of days after introduction such as . The specific day of the week may be, for example, a single specific day of the week such as Friday, or a plurality of specific days of the week such as Friday and Saturday. As the specific date information, for example, a single specific date (specific date) such as "8th" from "pachi" in pachinko, "8th", which is a day with "8" from "pachi" in pachinko, A plurality of specific days (specific dates) such as "18th" and "28th" can be set.

It should be noted that the time period information, the number of days after introduction, the specific day of the week information, and the specific day information may be used singly or in combination. In a single case, there is time zone information. In the case of combination, there is a combination of information on the number of days since introduction and time period information, there is a combination of specific day of the week information and time period information, and there is a combination of specific day information and time period information.

Further, in the case of a single information, in addition to the time period information, any one of information on the number of elapsed days since introduction, information on a specific day of the week, and information on a specific day may be used. In this case, although it is possible to determine the day on which the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is to be performed, the time period (start time and end time) to perform the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect Since the time) cannot be determined, the time zone (start time and end time) is determined by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107 to control them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7 . The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 . The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15, and controls the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15 according to the motion pattern data. 2 Control the operation of the movable accessory 15 . Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button 63 , a select button 68 , and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108 . The effect button 63 outputs a switch signal to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108 when pressed (depressed) by the player. Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the effect button 63 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The production button 63 is not only pressable, but also position-changeable between a normal position (recessed position) in which the upper surface of the button body part slightly protrudes, and a protruding position in which most of the button body part protrudes. It's becoming That is, the production button 63 is raised as one of the productions. The production control microcomputer 91 creates position change data (driving data) for changing the position of the production button 63, and controls the operation of the production button 63 according to the position change data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create position change data. The select button 68 outputs a switch signal to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108 when pressed (depressed) by the player.

The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the motion of the frame movable body 600 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 may be connected to a touch sensor or the like provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal upon contact with a human body.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) is provided with a program storage area 83a and a table storage area 83b. The table storage area 83b contains a jackpot determination table, a reach determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a variation pattern determination table, an electronic chew opening pattern determination table, and a large winning opening pattern. determination table, etc. are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 84e, and a normal figure pending storage. An area 84f, a setting information storage area 84g, and a work area 84h are provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), such as a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a probability variable flag, a time saving flag, a ceiling flag, etc. set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a variable probability counter, a short time counter, a game counter, and a ceiling counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 84e includes a first special figure reservation storage area in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for this purpose. In the second special figure reservation storage area, the first memory for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 84f stores a random number group (reservation information) such as a general pattern random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth general pattern reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The setting information storage area 84g is an area for storing the setting information of the gaming machine set by the setting change device 71 (FIG. 3). The setting information is information that is set in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6. FIG. The work area 84h is a work area that implements temporary storage for calculations and the like. The areas other than the work area 84h are backed up by a power source (not shown), and retain their contents even when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) is provided with a program storage area 93a and a table storage area 93b. The table storage area 93b stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table, a basic performance pattern determination table, a chance-up performance pattern determination table, a stop symbol pattern determination table, a setting suggestion performance execution table, a setting suggestion performance pattern table, and the like. These tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) includes a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a counter set area 94c, a setting information storage area 94d, a suggested state storage area 94e, a work area 94f, is provided.

The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a customer waiting command, and the like are stored.

The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set.

The counter set area 94c is an area where the counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and includes a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

The setting information storage area 94d is an area in which setting information output from the main control unit is stored.

The setting-suggestion state storage area 94e is an area for storing the state of the setting-suggestion effect and the state-related information related to the state. There are four states, ie, state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4, as states of the setting suggestion effect. The state-related information is information such as the history of these state transitions and the history of patterns of setting suggestion effects executed in each state.

The work area 94f is a work area that implements temporary storage for calculation and the like. It should be noted that areas other than the work area 94f are backed up by a power source (not shown), and retain their contents even when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the gaming machine 1 will now be described.
The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as Both are acquired as the value of the random number counter in the counter set area 84 c of the main RAM 84 . A plurality of random number counters are prepared corresponding to each.
The “jackpot random number” is a random number used in a lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535.
The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot type determination) for the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127.
"Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains, and it depends on which design the variably displayed production pattern is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a.

The “fluctuation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127.
“Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255.
The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the entry into the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area, and the random value group obtained based on the entry into the second start port 21 is stored in the first 2 It is stored in the special figure reservation storage area. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 84f.

Next, various random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the gaming machine 1 will be described.
The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a ``read-ahead performance random number'', a ``chance-up random number'', a ``setting suggestion execution random number'', and a ``setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number''. Both are acquired as the value of the random number counter in the counter set area 94c of the sub-RAM94. A plurality of random number counters are prepared corresponding to each.

"Random number for look-ahead effect" is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

The “setting suggestion execution random number” is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "setting suggestion execution random number" is acquired in conjunction with the execution of the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 24). The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

The “setting suggestion effect pattern determination random number” is a random number used to determine the content of the setting suggestion effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "setting suggestion effect pattern determination random number" is acquired in accordance with the execution of the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 24). The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

4. Description of Various Tables FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing a big hit determination table.
The jackpot determination table determines whether the jackpot random number (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "jackpot" or "losing". This table is referenced to The big win determination in the big win determination table is performed based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area 84g (FIG. 5). For example, if the setting information is "setting 1" in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 409", it is determined as a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 409" (410 to 65535)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, for example, if the setting information is "setting 1" in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 936", it is determined as a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is "0 to 936 other than Numerical value (937 to 65535)” is determined to be “losing”. The same applies to other setting information.

The reach determination table indicates whether the reach random number (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining. The reach determination in the reach determination table is performed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, in the "non-time-saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random number is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127) , it is determined that there is no reach. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach".

In the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether Determination in the normal symbol hitting determination table is performed based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 . In this embodiment, in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3 to 255 )”, it is determined as “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined to be "losing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). is a table referenced for In this embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time-saving state", and the variation time of normal symbols is determined to be "1 second" in the "time-saving state".

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type determination table is referred to in order to determine the “jackpot type” according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table where

In FIG. 8, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 77", the jackpot type is determined as "4R probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type random When the numerical value is "78-115", the jackpot type is determined as "8R normal jackpot", and when the jackpot type random number is "116-127", it is determined as "2R probability variable jackpot". In addition, the "2R probability variable jackpot" is a mode in which the jackpot is not notified. Hereinafter, it is also called “latency probability variable jackpot”.
On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 89", the jackpot type is determined to be "8R probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type random number is In the case of "90 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "8R normal jackpot". In addition, in the jackpot type determination table, the special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" may also be specified.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table during the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later).

In FIG. 9, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the jackpot determination table, it is determined as "with reach" in the reach determination table, and the number of pending balls is "1 to 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is “0 to 60”, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 10, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table, it is determined as "8R probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 ~10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1-3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

The electric chew opening pattern determination table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a table where In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "opening pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the opening pattern is determined as "opening pattern 12" in the "time saving state". In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

The large winning opening opening pattern determination table is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in order to determine the opening pattern of the large winning opening 30 in the main control process (described later). In this embodiment, in the case of "4R jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 21". In the "opening pattern 21", in the 1st to 4th rounds, the big prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). Also, in the case of "8R jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 22". In the "opening pattern 22", the large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening being 1 and the opening time being 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 8th rounds. In the case of "2R jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 23". In the "opening pattern 23", the large winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) with the number of opening times of 1 and the opening time of 0.1 seconds in the 1st to 2nd R's.

5. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed to open a jackpot (jackpot 30) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. There are four types of jackpots: "4R variable variable jackpot", "8R normal jackpot", "2R variable variable jackpot", and "8R variable variable jackpot". "Probability variable jackpot" becomes a high probability short-time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the “normal jackpot” becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state) after the jackpot game. It should be noted that the "2R probability variable jackpot" is executed without notifying the jackpot clearly, and since the jackpot (big jackpot 30) is short-opened, it is a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball. After the jackpot game, it becomes a high-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability low base state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 78/128 (about 60%) for the 4R probability variable jackpot and 38/128 (about 60%) for the 8R normal jackpot. 30%), and the 2R probability variable jackpot is 11/128 (about 10%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern (special drawing 2) is 90/128 (about 70%) for the 8R probability variable jackpot and 38/128 (about 30%) for the 8R normal jackpot. ing. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

6. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state", and the state in which the probability variation is not controlled is simply "normal probability state ( non-high-probability state, low-probability state)”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 7) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbols. A high-probability state is realized by performing Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 9 and 10) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more frequently in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in parallel with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a normal symbol hit determination table in which the number of normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state as the normal symbol probability fluctuation control. Then, hit judgment (ordinary design judgment) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal pattern is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state. Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the 4R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot is a high probability state and a time saving state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 30 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed.
In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the 8R normal jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, ie, low probability state) and a time saving state (high base state). This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 30 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed.
Furthermore, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the 2R probability variable jackpot is a high probability state and a non-time saving state. This game state is particularly referred to as "high probability low base state", "high probability non-time saving state", "latency probability variable state", "latency probability state". The high-probability-low base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 30 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed.
When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state and the low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

7. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18. FIG. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 .

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initialization process (step S001). In the initialization process, for example, settings of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number, normal symbol random number) to 1. Add and update. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 11) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). FIG. 13 is a flow chart of input processing. In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 . The various sensors are the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the big winning opening sensor 30a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the ejection sensor 25 (FIG. 3). The game control microcomputer 81 outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls corresponding to the winning openings, that is, the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the big winning opening 30, and the normal winning opening 27. set in the buffer. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 writes the number of outs (total number) detected by the discharge sensor 25 into the main RAM 84 . Then, every time the number of outs increases by "10", an out number command including the cumulative number of outs is set. Also, when the cumulative number of outs reaches "6000", it is reset to "0".

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103). In the starting opening sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the passage of the game ball through the gate 28, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter, stores the acquired random number in the normal symbol reservation storage area 84f of the main RAM 84. Among the first to fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the winning of the game ball to the second start port 21, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter. to get The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area.

The game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot prior determination in the starting opening sensor detection process. Based on the above-described random number group, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot and the variation pattern. Then, a pre-determination command is created from the pre-determination result and set in the command set area 84 a of the main RAM 84 .

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs normal operation processing (step S104). In normal operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the operation of the electric chew 22 . Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is "0". Make a hit judgment. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start the normal symbol variation display. After that, the variable display is stopped, and in the case of "hit", the electric chew opening pattern determination table is referred to, the electric chew opening pattern is set, and the electric chew 22 is operated.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special action processing (step S105). This special action process will be described later.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball number process (step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 . Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84 a of the main RAM 84 . The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. .

After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S107). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S108). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 12: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (big winning device 31) is divided into four stages, and each stage corresponds to a "special operation status" of "1", "2", "3", and " 4”. When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbols has passed and ends. Set the status to "3". When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first executes a game state management process. The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" when the jackpot flag is OFF. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is ON, a pattern for opening the jackpot is set according to the type of jackpot won. After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing. The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. After the game state reset process, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game. Then set the special action status to "4". When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Specifically, the opening of the big winning opening 30 is controlled according to the opening pattern based on the round counter, and the round designation command and the ending command are set. Also, at the end of the jackpot, a time-saving counter and a variable-probability counter are set.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 13: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area If not, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402). In the jackpot determination process, the number of games is incremented, and then the jackpot determination is performed. The jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table. Then, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big win, and when it is determined that it is a big win, it turns on the big win flag, determines the kind of big win, and then ends the big win determination processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). In the variation pattern selection process, with reference to the variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 9 and 10), the game state of the gaming machine 1 (whether it is a time saving state or a non-time saving state), the judgment result of the jackpot judgment processing (step S1402), the reserved ball Select a variation pattern based on the number. After the variation pattern selection process, to decrement the number of special figure 2 pending balls (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area to the side where it is read from the current position. While shifting one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area is reserved. It shifts to the digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area (of the four reserved images 9B, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9B from the left) are each 1 on the left side (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area If not, the process moves to step S1413. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408). In the jackpot determination process, the number of games is incremented, and then the jackpot determination is performed. The jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table. Then, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big win, and when it is determined that it is a big win, it turns on a big win flag, determines the kind of big win, and then ends the big win determination processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes variation pattern selection processing (step S1409). In the variation pattern selection process, with reference to the variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 9 and 10), the game state of the gaming machine 1 (whether it is a time saving state or a non-time saving state), the judgment result of the jackpot judgment processing (step S1408), the reserved ball Select a variation pattern based on the number. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area to the side where it is read from the current position by one. , Clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area is reserved. It shifts to the digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the right) are each 1 on the right side (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1412). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting command (step S1413), and finishes this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 8) of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation wins a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It's like

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 13: step S1306).
In the special symbol determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process will be described later.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). The jackpot flag is stored in the flag set area 84b of the main RAM84. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (step S1802: NO), that is, if the jackpot flag is OFF, the special operation status is set to "1" (step S1804), and the special symbol determination process is executed. finish.

In step S1803, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern. The open pattern is as described above, and the open pattern 21 is set for the 4R jackpot, the open pattern 22 for the 8R jackpot, and the open pattern 23 for the 2R jackpot.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a latent probability variable jackpot (step S1805). If it is determined that it is not a latent probability variable jackpot here (step S1805: NO), that is, if it is one of "4R probability variable jackpot", "8R normal jackpot", or "8R probability variable jackpot", the process proceeds to step S1806 . On the other hand, if it is determined to be a latent probability variable jackpot (step S1805: YES), that is, if it is a "2R probability variable jackpot", the process proceeds to step S1809.

In step S1806, the game control microcomputer 81 executes game state reset processing. This process is a process of resetting the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the ceiling flag.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command (step S1807), sets the special action status to "4" (step S1808), and ends the special symbol determination process.

In step S1809, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is stored in the flag set area 84b of the main RAM84. In particular, when the time saving flag is ON, the time saving flag is turned OFF. At this time, the ceiling flag and ceiling counter are not reset.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the variable probability counter to "30" (step S1810), sets the special action status to "1", and ends the special symbol determination process.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 15: step S1801).
In the game state management process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the variable probability counter is decremented (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not ON (step S2001: NO), that is, if the variable probability flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2003, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variable probability counter is "0". Here, when it is determined that the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process of step S2004 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. Here, when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the time saving counter is decremented (step S2006), and the process proceeds to step S2007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter is not ON (step S2005: NO), that is, if the time-saving counter is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2009.

In step S2007, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving counter is "0". When it is determined that the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is turned OFF (step S2008), and the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process of step S2008 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2009.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If it is determined that the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the ceiling counter is decremented (step S2011), and the process proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is not ON (step S2010: NO), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2012, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is "0". If it is determined that the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the process proceeds to step S2013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2013, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets "350" to the time saving counter (step S2014), turns off the ceiling flag (step S2015), and proceeds to step S2009.
In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command, and ends the game state management process.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing (FIG. 13: step S1308).
In the special electric accessary product process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S1601). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (step S1601: YES), ending processing is executed (step S1602), and the special electric accessary product processing ends. In the ending process, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed, and if it has passed, the jackpot end flag is turned OFF, the jackpot flag is turned OFF, the special action status is set to "1", and the game state is set. After executing the process (step S1603), the special electric accessary product process is terminated. The game state setting process will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (step S1601: NO), that is, when the jackpot end flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the big prize winning opening. This process is a process of determining whether or not there is a prize to the big winning hole 30 based on the signal from the big winning hole sensor 30a. Here, if it is determined that the player has won the big winning opening (step S1604: YES), a big winning opening command is set (step S1605), and the process proceeds to step S1606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has not won the big winning slot (step S1604: NO), the process proceeds to step S1606 without executing the process of step S1605.

In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening is open. This process is a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening 30 is open. Here, when it is determined that the large winning opening is open (step S1606: YES), the large winning opening closing process is executed (step S1607), and the special electric accessary product process ends. The large winning opening closing process is a process of determining whether or not a condition for closing the large winning opening is established, and closing the large winning opening when the closing condition is established. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big winning opening is not open (step S1607: NO), that is, if the big winning opening is closed, the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1608, it is determined whether or not it is the big winning opening open period. This process is a process of determining whether or not it is the opening period of the big winning opening 30 . Here, if it is determined that it is the large winning opening open period (step S1608: YES), the large winning opening opening process is executed (step S1610), the round designation command is set (step S1611), and the special electric accessory End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the big winning opening open period (step S1608: NO), round processing is executed (step S1609), and the special electric accessary product processing ends. In the round processing, it is determined whether or not the round is finished, and when the round is finished, the round counter is decremented, and when the round counter becomes "0", the ending command is set and the jackpot end flag is turned ON.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 17: step S1603).
In the game state setting process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot (step S1901). If it is determined here that it is a probability variable jackpot (step S1901: YES), the probability variable flag is turned ON (step S1902), the probability variable counter is set to 30 (step S1903), and the process proceeds to step S1904. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a probability variable jackpot (step S1901: NO), the processing of steps S1902 and S1093 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S1904.

In step S1904, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets "30" to the time saving counter (step S1905).
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the ceiling flag (step S1906), sets the ceiling counter (step S1907), sets the game state designation command (step S1908), and ends the game state setting process. .

8. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs an initialization process (step S4000). In the initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4001), and performs random number update processing (step S4002). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value in the counter set area 94c (FIG. 6B) by adding "1". When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4003). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4004) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19: step S4004). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4100). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the variation effect (step S4110). The processing during the variable effect is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable effect to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display effect. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4120). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output from the effect button 63, and the like.

After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes state transition process (step S4130). Details of the state transition processing will be described later. After the state transition processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes setting suggestion effect processing (step S4140). The details of the setting suggestion rendering process will also be described later.

After the setting suggestion effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission processing (step S4150). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4160), and ends this process. In other processing, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (step S4100 in FIG. 20). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4180). If it has been received (step S4180: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4190). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. It determines whether or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if not received (step S4180: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 84e contains a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of pending balls is received from the main control board 80 (step S4200). If received (step S4200: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4210). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94c of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4200: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4220). When receiving (step S4220: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4230). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4220: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4240). If it is received (step S4240: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4250). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the effect symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4240: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a hit-related command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4260). Win-related commands include a jackpot opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a small prize opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, and the like. Here, if it is received (step S4260: YES), a hit related effect pattern determination process corresponding to each command is performed (step S4270). For example, when an opening command for a big win is received, an effect pattern for the opening effect preset corresponding to the type of the big win is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is stored in the sub-RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (step S4130 in FIG. 18), the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image, It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . The same is true for other commands. On the other hand, if not received (step S4260: NO), the process of step S4270 is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an out number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4280). If it is determined that the out number command has been received (step S4280: YES), the out number storage process is executed (step S4290), and the process proceeds to step S4300. The number-of-outs storage process is a process of storing the number of outs included in the number-of-outs command as state-related information in the suggestive state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94. FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the out number command has not been received (step S4280: NO), the process of step S4290 is skipped. In step S4300, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes other processes and terminates the received command analysis process.

[State transition processing]
In order to facilitate understanding of the state transition processing, the state of the setting suggestion effect will be described first with reference to FIG. 22, and then the state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the state of the setting suggestion effect. The states of the setting suggestion effect are "state 1 setting normal" (also simply referred to as "state 1"), "state 2 setting high probability" (simply referred to as "state 2"), and "state 3 setting high reliability" (also referred to simply as "state 1"). There are four states, that is, simply referred to as "state 3") and "state 4 setting high confidence" (also simply referred to as "state 4"). These four states are transitioned by various triggers (conditions). The setting suggestion effect in this embodiment is performed based on these four states.

As shown in FIG. 22, "state 1 setting normal" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggesting effect is low and the reliability of the setting suggesting effect is low. "State 2 setting high certainty" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggesting effect is high and the reliability of the setting suggesting effect is low. "State 3 high confidence setting" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high. "State 4 high certainty of setting" is a state in which the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect is high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high. It should be noted that the state in which the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high is a state in which the amount of information regarding the setting determination obtained by one setting suggestion effect is large.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart of state transition processing (step S4130 in FIG. 20). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the condition for state up is satisfied (step S4401). If it is determined that the state-up condition is satisfied (step S4401: YES), state-up processing is executed (step S4402), and the process proceeds to step S4403. State-up processing includes step-up processing and jump-up processing. In step-up processing, the state is increased by "1". In the jump-up process, the state is raised by "2" or more. This state is stored in the setting suggestion state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94 as "setting suggestion effect state". On the other hand, if it is determined that the state-up condition is not satisfied (step S4401: NO), the process of step S4402 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S4403.

In step S4403, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the condition for state down has been established. If it is determined that the state down condition is satisfied (step S4403: YES), the state down process is executed (step S4404), and the state transition process ends. State-down processing includes step-down processing and jump-down processing. In step down processing, the state is lowered by "1". In the jump-down process, the state is lowered by "2" or more. This state is stored in the setting suggestion state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94 as "setting suggestion effect state". On the other hand, if it is determined that the state down condition is not satisfied (step S4403: NO), the state transition process is terminated without executing the process of step S4404.

[Setting Suggestion Effect Decision Processing]
FIG. 24 is a flow chart of setting suggestion effect determination processing (step S4140 in FIG. 20). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion timing (step S4501). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timing of the setting suggestion effect is determined in advance. For example, it is a predetermined timing in the variable performance, or the timing of starting/ending a specific game state. If it is determined that it is the setting suggestion timing (step S4501: YES), the process proceeds to step S4502. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the setting suggestion timing (step S4501: NO), the suggestion effect determination process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

In step S4502, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the setting suggestion effect state. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect state is stored in the setting suggestion state storage area 94e of the sub RAM 94 as "setting suggestion effect state".
Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the setting suggestion effect determination table (step S4503). The setting suggestion effect table will be described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect (step S4504). If it is determined here that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S4504: YES), the setting suggestion effect command is set (step S4505), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the setting suggestion effect (step S4505: NO), the process of step S4505 is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect process ends.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion rendering table. FIG. 25(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect execution table, and FIG. 25(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect pattern table.
The setting-suggestion effect execution table (FIG. 25(A)) is a table for determining whether or not to execute the setting-suggestion effect. The setting-suggestion effect table is referred to in the setting-suggestion effect determination process (step S4503 in FIG. 24). First, the setting suggestion effect execution table (FIG. 25(A)) is referred to. Here, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined based on the state of the setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion execution random number.

Specifically, when the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" or "state 3", if the value of the setting suggestion random number is any of "0 to 12", the setting suggestion effect is executed, otherwise If so, the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Also, if the state of setting suggestion production is "state 2" or "state 4", if the value of the setting suggestion random number is any of "0 to 89", the setting suggestion production is executed, otherwise Do not execute the setting suggestion performance. If it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect, the determination in step S4504 of FIG. 24 is affirmative.

The setting-suggestion effect pattern table (FIG. 25(B)) is a table for determining the content of the setting-suggestion effect. In the setting-suggestion effect determination process, when execution of the setting-suggestion effect is determined, a setting-suggestion effect command is set (step S4504 in FIG. 24: YES, step S4505). At this time, the setting-suggestion effect command includes the content (pattern) of the setting-suggestion effect, and the content is determined by the setting-suggestion effect pattern table. Here, the content (pattern) of the setting suggestion effect is determined based on the setting suggestion effect state, the setting information, and the setting suggestion effect pattern determination random number.

Specifically, when the setting suggestion effect state is "state 1" or "state 2", one of the patterns 1 to 6 is selected according to the setting information and the value of the setting suggestion effect pattern determination random number. Pattern 1 has a content of "Hmm, what do you think?". Pattern 2 has the content of "Do your best!". The content of pattern 3 is "Perhaps it is a good setting?!". Pattern 4 has the content of "It's quite a setting!". Pattern 5 has the content of "I guess so". Pattern 6 has the content "not bad!".

Further, when the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3" or "state 4", one of the patterns 7 to 13 is selected according to the setting information and the value of the setting suggestion effect pattern determination random number. Pattern 7 has a content of "Hmm, what do you think?". Pattern 8 has the content of "Do your best!". Pattern 9 has the content of "maybe a good setting?!". Pattern 10 has the content of "Even number setting!". Pattern 11 has the content of "Odd number setting!". Pattern 12 has a content of "setting 4 or more is confirmed!". Pattern 13 has the content of "Setting 5 or more is confirmed!".
Although the detailed allocation based on the value of the setting suggestion effect pattern determination random number is omitted, it is conceivable to select a plurality of patterns corresponding to the setting suggestion effect state and the setting information at the same ratio.

In this way, in states 3 and 4, the amount of information relating to setting discrimination obtained by the setting suggestion effect is greater than in states 1 and 2. In other words, in the states 3 and 4, the setting suggesting effect is executed so that the player can easily determine the setting. For example, if the effect of pattern 10 is executed, the setting is narrowed down to one of setting 2, 4, and 6. Also, for example, if the effect of pattern 11 is executed, the setting is narrowed down to one of setting 1, 3, and 5. For example, if the effect of pattern 12 is executed, the setting is narrowed down to one of settings 4-6. Also, for example, if the effect of pattern 13 is executed, the setting is narrowed down to either setting 5 or 6. For example, in states 3 and 4, setting 1 is negated if patterns 7-9 are executed. In addition, there are cases where the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, so that the setting can be completely determined. For example, if patterns 10 and 13 are executed, setting 6 is narrowed down. Also, for example, if patterns 11 and 13 are executed, setting 5 is narrowed down. Also, for example, when it is determined that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 2"→"state 3", if pattern 12 is executed, settings 4, 5, It will be narrowed down to one of 6. Also, for example, when it is determined that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by transitioning in order from "state 1" to "state 3", setting 5 or 6 is narrowed down if pattern 13 is executed. be done.

Cards that briefly explain the game specifications and effects are placed in the gaming machine 1, and booklets that briefly explain the game specifications and effects are placed in the game hall (hall). In the explanations of such cards and pamphlets, states 1 to 4 refer to states of setting suggestion effects in which the frequency (occurrence rate) of setting suggestion effects and the reliability (reliability rate) of setting suggestion effects are associated. Defined by four states, stepping up or jumping up one by one to state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4 (e.g., jumping up from state 1 to state 3). It is described that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes by doing so, and it is also described that a new game feature is given to the player aiming at state 4. The demo screen for waiting customers, which is the standby screen, also displays the contents described in the explanations on the cards and pamphlets.

9. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Hereinbelow, a description will be given of an effect example, an effect example, a modification example, and an aspect example of the present embodiment.
In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the setting suggestion effect state (FIG. 22). In other words, it has a "state" for executing the setting suggestion effect, and by changing (transitioning) this state, the setting suggestion effect is made different. Concretely, the state of setting suggestion effect can take four states of state 1 to state 4 depending on the occurrence probability and reliability of setting suggestion effect. Further, the closer to the state 4, the more advantageous setting determination can be made in the setting suggesting effect. As a result, in order to make the setting suggestion effect advantageous, a game feature is provided in which state 4 is aimed at as the setting suggestion effect state. The state change (transition) of the setting suggestion effect is performed in state transition processing (FIG. 23). In the state-up process (step S4402), the setting suggestion effect transitions from the first state of the setting suggestion effect states to the second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be an effect more advantageous to the player than the first state. ``The second state in which the setting suggesting effect can be an advantageous effect for the player compared to the first state'' is not only when the reliability of the setting suggesting effect is higher than in the first state, but also in comparison with the first state. This includes the case where the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion performance is increased, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the state down process (step S4404), the state transitions from the second state to the first state. Specific examples of the state-up condition in step S4401 and the state-down condition in step S4403 will be described below.

The state change effect of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect when performing the setting suggestion effect to suggest the setting information to the player. The state of the attached setting suggestion effect is defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and step up or jump up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. (For example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3) changes the state of the setting suggestion effect, giving the player a new game feature of aiming for state 4. . Of course, in the state of the setting suggestion effect, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4, stepping down one by one, It may also jump down (eg, jump down from state 3 to state 1).

26 to 28, the state change effects A to C of the setting suggestion effects will be described. State change effects A to C of the setting suggestion effect are effects associated with changes in the state of the setting suggestion effect. Here, in particular, the effect is to explicitly or imply the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[State change effect A of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect A of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 26(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Here, a dedicated background image SH1 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the left, middle, and right performance symbols. The temporary stop-displayed performance symbols oscillate until they are fixed-stop-displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4". Here, too, the dedicated background image SH1 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(C), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has changed from "state 1" to "state 2". A dedicated background image SH2 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2" is displayed so that this change can be seen. In addition, a state display JH of "state 2 setting is accurate" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a dedicated background image SH2 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(E), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. In the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is a effect of displaying a setting suggesting image after the fluctuation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "That's a good setting!" is displayed. Also, a dedicated background image SH2 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the left, middle, and right performance symbols. The temporary stop-displayed performance symbols oscillate until they are fixed-stop-displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6", which are temporarily stopped. Here, too, the dedicated background image SH2 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has changed from "state 2" to "state 3". A dedicated background image SH3 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3" so that this change can be seen. In addition, a state display JH of "state 3 set high confidence" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(H), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a dedicated background image SH3 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(I), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the left, middle, and right performance symbols. The temporary stop-displayed performance symbols oscillate until they are fixed-stop-displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "8", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3", which are temporarily stopped. Here, too, the dedicated background image SH3 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "8", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has changed from "state 3" to "state 4". A dedicated background image SH4 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is displayed so that this change can be seen. In addition, a state display JH of "state 4 setting high confidence" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(K), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a dedicated background image SH4 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(L), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a message image after the fluctuation start effect (for example, one second later). In this case, a message image SS saying "Setting 5 or more is confirmed!" is displayed. Also, a dedicated background image SH4 is displayed to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4".

[State change effect B of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect B of the setting suggestion effect. The state change effect B of the setting suggestion effect is another example of the state change effect A of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 27(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Here, a status icon JI including a character string of "status 1" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 1" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(B), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the left, middle, and right performance symbols. The temporary stop-displayed performance symbols oscillate until they are fixed-stop-displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4". Here, too, the status icon JI including the character string "status 1" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 1" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(C), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has changed from "state 1" to "state 2". A status icon JI including a character string of "status 2" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 2" is displayed so that this change can be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(D), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the state icon JI including the character string "state 2" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(E), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. In the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is a effect of displaying a setting suggesting image after the fluctuation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "That's a good setting!" is displayed. Also, a state icon JI including a character string of "state 2" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the left, middle, and right performance symbols. The temporary stop-displayed performance symbols oscillate until they are fixed-stop-displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6", which are temporarily stopped. Here, too, the status icon JI including the character string "status 2" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(G), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has changed from "state 2" to "state 3". A status icon JI including a character string of "status 3" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 3" is displayed so that this change can be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(H), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a status icon JI including a character string of "status 3" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 3" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(I), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect of temporarily stopping the left, middle, and right performance symbols. The temporary stop-displayed performance symbols oscillate until they are fixed-stop-displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "8", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3", which are temporarily stopped. Here, too, the status icon JI including the character string "status 3" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 3" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "8", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has changed from "state 3" to "state 4". A status icon JI including a character string of "status 4" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 4" is displayed so that this change can be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(K), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the state icon JI including the character string "state 4" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(L), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a message image after the fluctuation start effect (for example, one second later). In this case, a message image SS saying "Setting 5 or more is confirmed!" is displayed. Also, a status icon JI including a character string of "status 4" indicating that the setting suggestion effect status is "status 4" is displayed.

[State change effect C of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect C of the setting suggestion effect. The state change effect C of the setting suggestion effect is another example of the state change effects A and B of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 28(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4". However, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has not changed. Further, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(C), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Also at this time, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a mode (special eyes) corresponding to the state of setting suggestion production. A mode of "004" in the production pattern indicates that the state of setting suggestion production is "state 4". In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has not changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(E), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. In the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is a effect of displaying a setting suggesting image after the fluctuation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Even number confirmed!" is displayed. A display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has not changed. Further, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Also at this time, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a mode (special eyes) corresponding to the state of setting suggestion production. A mode of "004" in the production pattern indicates that the state of setting suggestion production is "state 4". In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has not changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(I), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Here, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of setting suggestion rendering has not changed. Further, the display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(K), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a message image after the fluctuation start effect (for example, one second later). In this case, a message image SS saying "Setting 5 or more is confirmed!" is displayed. A display indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop effect is an effect that causes the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol to be fixed-stop displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3", which are fixed and stopped. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a mode (special eyes) corresponding to the state of setting suggestion production. A mode of "003" in the production pattern indicates that the state of setting suggestion production is "state 3". In this embodiment, at the timing of the fixed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed from "state 4" to "state 3".

The state change performance C of the setting suggestion performance is different from the state change performances A and B of the setting suggestion performance that always specify the state of the setting suggestion performance. In the state change performance C of the setting suggesting performance, the state of the setting suggesting performance is indicated by stopping the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R in a mode (special eye) corresponding to the state of the setting suggesting performance. When the state of setting suggestion performance is "state 1", the performance pattern is stopped at "001". Further, when the state of the setting suggestive performance is "state 2", the performance pattern is stopped at "002".

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect for making suggestions based on the setting information is executed (FIGS. 26(E)(L), 27(E)(L), 28(E)(K)). . The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting-suggestion performance states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting-suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting-suggestion performance (FIG. 22). The setting-suggestion effect state transitions when a specific condition is established (FIG. 23). According to this configuration, by introducing the concept of the state of the setting suggesting performance and changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggesting performance, it is possible to realize an unprecedented setting suggesting performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. Incidentally, the state of the setting suggesting effect corresponds to the "setting suggesting effect state".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect includes a plurality of states in which at least one of the setting suggestion effect execution frequency (occurrence probability) and the setting suggestion effect reliability is different from each other (FIG. 22). . According to this configuration, by changing the state of the setting suggestion effect, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect or the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the state of the setting suggestion effect, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low. Relatively high setting suggestion production reliability is relatively low Setting high certainty state, setting suggestion production execution frequency is relatively low Setting suggestion production reliability is relatively high Setting high confidence state, setting suggestion production Four states are included, ie, a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high (FIG. 22). According to this configuration, by changing the state of the setting suggestion effect, the execution frequency and reliability of the setting suggestion effect are changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Specifically, when the reliability of the setting suggestion effect increases, the amount of information regarding the setting determination obtained by one setting suggestion effect increases. For example, as in pattern 12 in FIG. 25, "4 or more settings are confirmed!" will confirm settings 4-6. Also, for example, like pattern 13, if "5 or more settings are confirmed!", settings 5 and 6 are confirmed. For example, in the high confidence state, for setting 1, patterns 8 and 9 are not selected. Therefore, the pattern selected when the reliability is high also helps the setting determination.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 corresponding to the four states of the setting suggestion effect are displayed (FIG. 26). According to this configuration, the state of the setting suggestion effect and its change can be easily understood by the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 correspond to "background images".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, state icons JI corresponding to four states of the setting suggestion effect are displayed (FIG. 27). According to this configuration, the state of the setting suggestion effect and its change can be easily understood by the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the status icon JI corresponds to the "icon image".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display the effect symbols in modes corresponding to the four states of the setting suggestion effect (FIGS. 28(D), (H), and (L)). Specifically, if the state is 1, the special eye is "001"; if the state is 2, the special eye is "002"; if the state is 3, the special eye is "003"; In some cases, the frequency of stopping at the special eye "004" increases. According to this configuration, the state of the setting-suggestion effect is not always displayed, so that the enjoyment when knowing the state of the setting-suggestion effect increases, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect increases step by step (step up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, and state 3→state 4. However, for example, the state 1→state 3, state 1→state 4, and state 2→state 4 may be configured to jump up by two or more.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect is configured to descend one by one (step down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, and state 2→state 1. However, for example, the state 4→state 1, the state 3→state 1, and the state 4→state 2 may be configured to jump down by two or more.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 and the status icon JI are always displayed. On the other hand, the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 and the status icon JI may be displayed at a constant frequency, similar to the display of the special eyes. In this case, since the state of the setting-suggestion effect is not always displayed, the enjoyment when knowing the state of the setting-suggestion effect increases, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect is indicated using the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4, the status icon JI, or the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. On the other hand, it is also possible to output music suggesting the state of the setting suggestion effect. For example, the BGM during the normal game may be changed to the BGM corresponding to the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 1-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
The plurality of setting-suggestion rendering states transition when a specific condition is established,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
The plurality of setting-suggestion effect states are different from each other in at least one of the setting-suggestion effect execution frequency and the setting-suggestion effect reliability.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1-2,
In the setting suggestion production state,
a setting normal state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low;
a setting high certainty state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high;
contains four states of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
capable of displaying a background image suggesting the setting suggesting production state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
capable of displaying an icon image suggesting the setting suggestion rendering state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to display a production pattern in a manner suggesting the setting suggestion production state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-6,
Capable of outputting music suggesting the setting suggestion production state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects D to F of the setting suggestive effects will be described with reference to FIGS. The state change effects D to F are effects for changing the state of the setting suggestion effect. Here, in particular, the effect that triggers the change (transition) of the state of the setting suggestion effect will be described.

[State change effect D of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect D of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 29(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 29B, a mission display effect is executed. The mission display effect is a effect of displaying one mission out of a plurality of prepared missions. In this case, a message image MS is displayed that reads, "Reach with 7 within 3 rotations." This mission will be a success if it becomes a reach with a "7" symbol during 3 rotations (fluctuation).

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(C), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4". No mission accomplished here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(D), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(E), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6" and is fixed and stopped. Again, the mission has not been accomplished.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(F), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L gradually slows down and the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, the left production pattern 8L is stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In the ready-to-win performance, the movement speed of the right performance symbol 8R is gradually slowed down, and the ready-to-win state is to be formed. Here, as the right effect symbol 8R, the "7" symbol moves slowly downward as indicated by the arrow Y, and shows the state of prompting whether or not to form the ready-to-win mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation effect is an effect to form a ready-to-win mode by stopping the right effect pattern 8R at the same pattern as the left effect pattern 8L. Here, the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the same "7" symbol as the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, since the mission was accomplished with just three rotations, the message image MS reading "Mission successful!" is displayed. In addition, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4" due to the success of this mission. Therefore, the state icon JI including the character string "state 4" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(J), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggesting image SS saying "Five or more settings are confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that the setting of the gaming machine 1 is either the setting 5 or the setting 6. FIG. At this time, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(K), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The big hit confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the confirmation of the big win. Here, a message image MS reading "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7".

Thus, in the state change effect D of the setting suggestion effect, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) by achieving the mission displayed in the mission display effect.

[State change effect E of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect E of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 30(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, character images of "high accuracy" and "high confidence" are displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and gauge images of 3 squares are displayed on the right side of each character image. Hereinafter, the character image and the gauge image in the upper row are also referred to as a "high accuracy gauge". In addition, the character image and the gauge image in the lower row are also referred to as "High-Sensitivity Gauge". The High Accuracy Gauge and High Reliability Gauge are similarly displayed below. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the "7" symbol stops in the medium effect symbol 8C in the mode of losing, either the high accuracy gauge or the high confidence gauge increases by one memory. When the high-precision gauge becomes full (3 memories), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 2". When the high confidence gauge becomes full (3 memories), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 3". When the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge become full (3 memories), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 4". Then, each time the setting suggestion effect is executed, either the high accuracy gauge or the high confidence gauge is decreased by one memory. Then, when the high confidence gauge remains and the high accuracy gauge becomes "0", it changes (transitions) to "state 3". When the high-confidence gauge becomes "0" while the high-accuracy gauge remains, the state changes (transitions) to "state 2". When both the high accuracy gauge and the high reliability gauge become "0", the state changes (transitions) to "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2". Then, when the medium effect pattern 8C becomes the "7" pattern in this manner, points are added. Specifically, a message image MS of "get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the high accuracy gauge is increased by 1 memory (indicated by hatching).

Each time such variable display of the performance symbols is repeated and the "7" symbol stops in the middle performance symbol 8C, the high accuracy gauge or the high confidence gauge increases. Here, when the "7" symbol stops, the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge are alternately increased. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that both the high-precision gauge and the high-confidence gauge have two memories.

In FIG. 30(C), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, both the high accuracy gauge and the high reliability gauge have two memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "8". Then, when the medium effect pattern 8C becomes the "7" pattern in this manner, points are added. Specifically, a message image MS of "get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the high accuracy gauge is increased by 1 memory (indicated by hatching). As a result, the high accuracy gauge becomes full (3 memories), and the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH reading "state 2!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(E), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the high accuracy gauge has 3 memories, and the high reliability gauge has 2 memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "6", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3". Then, when the medium effect pattern 8C becomes the "7" pattern in this manner, points are added. Specifically, a message image MS of "get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Also, the high reliability gauge is increased by 1 memory (indicated by hatching). As a result, both the high-accuracy gauge and the high-confidence gauge are filled (3 memories), and the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 4". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH reading "state 4!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(G), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the variable start effect and makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Five or more settings are confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that the setting of the gaming machine 1 is either the setting 5 or the setting 6. FIG. At this time, the high accuracy gauge is reduced by one memory due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3". At this time, the high accuracy gauge has 2 memories, and the high reliability gauge has 3 memories.

Each time such variable display of performance symbols is repeated and the setting suggestion performance is executed following the variable start performance, the high accuracy gauge or the high confidence gauge decreases. Here, the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge are alternately decreased when the setting suggestion performance is executed. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that both the high accuracy gauge and the high reliability gauge are one memory.

In FIG. 30(I), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the variable start effect and makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a setting suggestion image SS saying "Maybe a good setting?!". At this time, the high-accuracy gauge is decreased by 1 memory and becomes "0" due to the execution of the setting suggestion performance. Note that the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6". At this time, the high accuracy gauge is "0" and the high reliability gauge is 1 memory. As a result, the setting suggestion effect state changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH of "State 3!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 30(K), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the variable start effect and makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Odd number confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Thus, it can be seen that the setting of the game machine 1 is the setting 5. At this time, the high confidence gauge is decreased by one memory and becomes "0" due to the execution of the setting suggesting effect. Note that the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is "0". At this time, both the high accuracy gauge and the high reliability gauge are "0". As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 1". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH saying "state 1!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

[State change effect F of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect F of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 31(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. A character image of "Point" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a gauge image of three cells is displayed on the right side of the character image. Hereinafter, the character image and the gauge image are also referred to as "point gauge". The point gauge is similarly displayed below. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

In this embodiment, when the point gauge reaches 1 memory, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 2". Also, when the point gauge reaches 2 memories, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 3". Furthermore, when the point gauge reaches 3 memories, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 4". The points are added by stopping the "7" symbol in the medium effect symbol 8C, and the point gauge is increased by one memory. On the other hand, the subtraction of the points is performed by executing the setting suggestion effect, and the point gauge is decreased by one memory.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2". Then, when the medium effect pattern 8C becomes the "7" pattern in this manner, points are added. Specifically, a message image MS of "get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the point gauge increases by 1 memory (shown with hatching). As a result, the point gauge becomes one memory, and the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH reading "state 2!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, in FIG. 31(C), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the point gauge is 1 memory.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "8". Then, when the medium effect pattern 8C becomes the "7" pattern in this manner, points are added. Specifically, a message image MS of "get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the point gauge increases by 1 memory (shown with hatching). As a result, the point gauge becomes 2 memories, and the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 3". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH of "State 3!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, in FIG. 31(E), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the point gauge has two memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "6", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3". Then, when the medium effect pattern 8C becomes the "7" pattern in this manner, points are added. Specifically, a message image MS of "get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the fixed stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the point gauge increases by 1 memory (shown with hatching). As a result, the point gauge becomes 3 memories, and the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH reading "state 4!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the variable start effect and makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Five or more settings are confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that the setting of the gaming machine 1 is either the setting 5 or the setting 6. FIG. At this time, the point gauge is reduced by one memory due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3". At this time, the point gauge has two memories. As a result, the setting suggestion effect state changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH of "State 3!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(I), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the variable start effect and makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, there is displayed a setting suggestion image SS saying "Maybe a good setting?!". At this time, the high-precision gauge is reduced by 1 memory to 1 memory due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6". At this time, the high accuracy gauge is set to 1 memory. As a result, the setting suggestion effect state changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 2". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH reading "state 2!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(K), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the variable start effect and makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Odd number confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Thus, it can be seen that the setting of the game machine 1 is the setting 5. At this time, the point gauge is decreased by one memory and becomes "0" due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is "0". At this time, the point gauge is "0". As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 1". In order to make this change visible, a state display JH saying "state 1!" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting suggestion effect for making suggestions based on the setting information is executed (FIG. 29(J)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting-suggestion performance states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting-suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting-suggestion performance (FIG. 22). Here, in particular, it is possible to execute a mission production that becomes successful by achieving the presented mission, and when the mission production succeeds, the state of the setting suggestion production (set suggestion production state) is changed from the first state to the first state. 29(B)-(I)). Specifically, when the mission effect is successful in FIG. 29(I), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4". Therefore, the "state 3" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". According to this configuration, the mission effect becomes an important effect that leads to setting determination, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting suggestion effect for making suggestions based on the setting information is executed (FIGS. 30(G)(I)(K), FIGS. 31(G)(I)(K)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting-suggestion performance states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting-suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting-suggestion performance (FIG. 22). Here, in particular, it is possible to execute a point addition effect that adds a specific point, and when the points satisfy a predetermined condition, the state of the setting suggestion effect (set suggestion effect state) is compared from the first state to the first state. A transition is made to the second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be an advantageous effect for the player (FIGS. 30(D)(F), FIGS. 31(B)(D)(F)). For example, in FIG. 30(D), the state of setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) from "state 1" to "state 2". Therefore, the "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 2" corresponds to the "second state". Further, for example, in FIG. 30(F), the state of setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) from "state 2" to "state 4". Therefore, the "state 2" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". For example, when FIG. 30 (D) and (F) are combined, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 4". Therefore, the "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". The same applies to FIGS. 31(B), (D) and (F). According to this configuration, the point addition effect becomes an important effect that leads to setting determination, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a point subtraction effect for subtracting points, and when the points satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting suggestion effect state (setting suggestion effect state) is changed from the second state to the first state. (FIGS. 30(J)(L), FIGS. 31(H)(J)(L)). For example, in FIG. 30(J), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". Therefore, the "state 4" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and the "state 3" corresponds to the "first state". Further, for example, in FIG. 30(L), the state of setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) from "state 3" to "state 1". Therefore, the "state 3" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and the "state 1" corresponds to the "first state". For example, when FIG. 30 (J) and (L) are combined, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 1". Therefore, the "state 4" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and the "state 1" corresponds to the "first state". The same applies to FIGS. 31(H), (J), and (L). According to this configuration, the change (transition) of the state of the setting suggestion effect is associated with the points, making it easier to understand, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the point subtraction effect is executed when the setting suggestion effect is executed (FIGS. 30(G)(I)(K), FIGS. 31(G)(I)(K)). According to this configuration, the setting-suggestion effect can be reliably executed in each state of the setting-suggestion effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the point addition process is triggered by execution of a predetermined effect (FIGS. 30(B), (D), and (F), FIGS. 31(B), (D), and (F)). According to this configuration, the predetermined effect becomes an important effect that leads to setting determination, and the interest in the game can be improved. Incidentally, the fixed stop effect of the losing mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C is the "7" symbol corresponds to the "predetermined effect".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, points are displayed as gauge images (FIGS. 30 and 31). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the increase or decrease of the points, and furthermore, it becomes easy to understand the change (transition) of the state of the setting suggestion effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect increases step by step (step up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, and state 3→state 4. However, for example, the state 1→state 3, state 1→state 4, and state 2→state 4 may be configured to jump up by two or more.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect is configured to descend one by one (step down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, and state 2→state 1. However, for example, the state 4→state 1, the state 3→state 1, and the state 4→state 2 may be configured to jump down by two or more.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, when the "7" symbol stops in the middle effect symbol 8C, the point addition effect is performed. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which point addition processing is performed by achieving a mission effect as shown in FIG.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the mission effect of "reach with 7 within 3 rotations" was exemplified, but various mission effects can be selectively used. Specifically, it may be a mission presentation that the player can accomplish by himself. For example, "make 200 revolutions within 1 hour", "make 300 continuous revolutions without waiting for customers", "press the button at the right time", and the like. Also, it may be a mission effect related to the main control. For example, there is a "get a jackpot within 100 spins". Furthermore, it may be a mission production related to sub-control. For example, make a specific notice appear.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the point subtraction effect is executed with the execution of the setting suggestion effect as a trigger, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, like the point addition effect, the point subtraction effect may be executed with the mission effect as a trigger.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 2-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
It is possible to execute a point addition effect of adding a specific point, and when the points meet a predetermined condition through the point addition effect, the Transition to a second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be an advantageous effect for the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
A point subtraction effect for subtracting the points is executable, and when the points satisfy a predetermined condition through the point subtraction effect, the setting suggestion effect state transitions from the second state to the first state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2-2,
The point subtraction effect is executed with the execution of the setting suggestion effect as a trigger.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The point addition effect is executed with the execution of a predetermined effect as a trigger,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2-4,
The predetermined effect is a mission effect that becomes successful by achieving the presented mission,
The point addition effect is executed by succeeding in the mission effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-5,
displaying the points as a gauge image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-7]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
It is possible to execute a successful mission production by completing the presented mission,
When the mission effect is successful, a transition is made from a first state among the setting suggesting effect states to a second state in which the setting suggesting effect can be a more advantageous effect for the player than the first state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects G to I of the setting suggesting effects will be described with reference to FIGS. The state change effects G to I are effects for changing the state of the setting suggestion effect. Here, in particular, an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggestion effect with the result of the lottery as a trigger is shown.

[State change effect G of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect G of the setting suggestion effect. The setting-suggestion effect state change effect G is an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting-suggestion effect when the result is a loss in spite of the so-called intense effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 32(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(C), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MS of "development strongest battle reach" is displayed. Also, a reliability display SD of a star-shaped image is displayed. The reliability here is 4 out of 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(D), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, if the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, the game is lost.

If the result of the lottery is a loss, a defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 32(E). The defeat effect is a effect when the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. Here, an enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS of "defeat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is "6" and fixed and stopped. When the result of the lottery is thus lost and the specific effect is executed, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions). In order to make this change visible, a state display JH of "state 2 setting high accuracy" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

[State change effect H of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect H of the setting suggestion effect. The state change effect H of the setting suggestion effect is an example in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) in the case of a non-probable normal jackpot.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 33(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(B), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggesting image SS saying "Something okay" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(C), a ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "6", and the middle performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(D), medium design low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The middle symbol low speed fluctuation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, moves at a low speed. Here, the "6" symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is shown moving as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation production is a production in which the jackpot is confirmed. Here, a message image MS reading "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "6". It is assumed that the jackpot with the "6" symbol is the "8R normal jackpot" (FIG. 8). In this way, when the result of the lottery is winning and the special symbol determined along with the lottery is a specific winning symbol, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions). To make this change visible, a state display JH of "state 3 set high" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

[State change effect I of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect I of the setting suggestion effect. The setting-suggestion effect state change effect I is an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting-suggestion effect when a specific type of failure occurs.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 34(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(B), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Even number confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "6", and the middle performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(D), medium design low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The middle symbol low speed fluctuation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, moves at a low speed. Here, the "6" symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is shown moving as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(E), medium design low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The middle symbol low speed fluctuation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, moves at a low speed. Here, the "7" symbol as the medium effect symbol 8C is shown moving as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "6", and the middle production pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "7". When the result of the lottery is a loss in this way and the special symbol determined along with the lottery is a specific lost symbol, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions). To make this change visible, a state display JH of "state 4 setting high confidence" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information is executed (FIGS. 33(B) and 34(B)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting-suggestion performance states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting-suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting-suggestion performance (FIG. 22). Here, in particular, based on the result of the lottery, a transition process is executed to make a transition from the first state to a second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be a more advantageous effect for the player than in the first state (FIG. 32(F)). , FIGS. 33(F) and 34(F)). For example, in FIG. 32(F), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2". Therefore, the "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 2" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 33(F), the setting suggestion effect state is changed (transitioned) from "state 2" to "state 3". Therefore, the "state 2" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 34(F), the setting suggestion effect state is changed (transitioned) from "state 3" to "state 4". Therefore, the "state 3" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". According to this configuration, the result of the lottery such as the jackpot is important for determining the setting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the specific effect is executed in the notification of the result of the lottery (FIG. 32). At this time, the specific effect is a effect with a relatively high degree of reliability for the jackpot (a effect with the highest battle reach). According to this configuration, even if an effect with a relatively high degree of reliability is lost, it can be expected to be in an advantageous state in setting determination, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined along with the lottery is a specific losing symbol (FIG. 34). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect an advantageous state in the determination of the setting even if there is a change in normal loss, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is winning and the special symbol determined along with the lottery is a specific winning symbol (FIG. 33). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect to be in an advantageous state in the determination of the setting even if, for example, a non-probability variable jackpot, etc., and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting-suggestion effect increases one by one (step-up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, and state 3→state 4. However, for example, the state 1→state 3, state 1→state 4, and state 2→state 4 may be configured to jump up by two or more.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect is configured to descend one by one (step down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, and state 2→state 1. However, for example, the state 4→state 1, the state 3→state 1, and the state 4→state 2 may be configured to jump down by two or more.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) in the case of a specific jackpot (FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the case of a specific small hit, it may be configured to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion effect. That is, the transition process may be performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined along with the lottery is a specific small winning symbol. According to this configuration, for example, even if a small win does not lead to a big win in one or two types of gaming machines, it can be expected to be in an advantageous state in setting determination, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, when the effect of the strongest battle reach is lost, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transition) (FIG. 32). In addition to this, it is conceivable to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion effect when the super hot effect is lost. For example, it is conceivable that, among the notice effects, a super-hot notice effect may result in a loss, or a super-hot pattern may appear and cause a loss.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) in the case of the non-variable normal jackpot (FIG. 33). In addition to this, a configuration is conceivable in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) in the case of a big win under a specific situation. For example, it is conceivable that the first hit is a big win without time saving, and the case of a normal big win during time saving.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the state of setting suggestion effect is stepped up. On the other hand, under the same conditions, a step-down (or jump-down) configuration may be used. For example, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the special pattern determined with the lottery is a specific losing pattern, step up, the result of the lottery is a hit, and with the lottery If the special pattern determined by the step is a specific winning pattern, step down is performed. Also, for example, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the special pattern determined along with the lottery is a specific losing pattern, a lottery is further performed and step-up or step-down is performed based on the result. good too.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 3-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
Transition processing for making a transition from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be a more advantageous performance for the player than the first state, based on at least the result of the lottery. is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and a specific effect is executed in the notification of the result of the lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 3-1 or aspect 3-2,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the special design determined along with the lottery is a specific losing design,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined along with the lottery is a specific small winning symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a win and the special design determined with the lottery is a specific winning design,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-5,
The transition processing includes transition from the second state to the first state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

35 to 37, state change effects J to L of setting suggestive effects will be described. The state change effects J to L are effects for changing the state of the setting suggesting effect. Here, in particular, an example will be described in which the number of consecutive jackpots and the history of the jackpot trigger the change (transition) of the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[State change effect J of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect J of the setting suggestion effect. The state change effect J of the setting suggestion effect is an effect that changes (transitions) the state of the setting suggestion effect according to the number of consecutive games of the jackpot. Here, in particular, an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggestion effect along with the notification of the jackpot will be shown.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 35(A). The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(B), a ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(C), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all determined and stopped at "5" to inform the player of the big win. It should be noted that the jackpot with the "5" symbol is assumed to be the 4R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(D), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying that a jackpot has been achieved. Here, a message image MS of "big hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. A jackpot game is a game in which a larger number of game balls than usual can be acquired by winning a game ball into the big winning hole 30, which is executed by so-called right-handed hitting. The explanation will be continued assuming that the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) is shifted after the jackpot game.

In FIG. 35(E), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of how many rotations in the probability variation gaming state. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all determined and stopped at "7" to notify that a big win has occurred. It should be noted that the jackpot in the "7" pattern is assumed to be the 8R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(G), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying that a jackpot has been achieved. In this case, a message image MS reading "2nd jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) due to the double winning. In order to make this change visible, a state display JH of "state 2 setting high accuracy" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. A jackpot game is a game in which a larger number of game balls than usual can be acquired by winning a game ball into the big winning hole 30, which is executed by so-called right-handed hitting. The explanation will be continued assuming that the state is changed to the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game.

In FIG. 35(H), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of how many rotations in the probability variation gaming state. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(I), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "7" to notify that a big win has occurred. It should be noted that the jackpot in the "7" pattern is assumed to be the 8R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(J), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying that a jackpot has been achieved. In this case, a message image MS of "big win 3rd time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) due to the trinity of jackpots. In order to make this change visible, a state display JH of "state 3 set high" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. A jackpot game is a game in which a larger number of game balls than usual can be acquired by winning a game ball into the big winning hole 30, which is executed by so-called right-handed hitting. The explanation will be continued assuming that the state is changed to the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game.

In FIG. 35(K), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, and right performance symbols start to change. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of how many rotations in the probability variation gaming state. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

In FIG. 35(L), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Five or more settings are confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Thereby, it can be determined that the setting of the gaming machine 1 is the setting 5 or the setting 6. FIG.

[State change effect K of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect K of the setting suggestion effect. The setting-suggestion effect state change effect K is an effect that changes (transitions) the state of the setting-suggestion effect in accordance with the number of consecutive games of the jackpot. Here, in particular, an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggestion effect at the end of the advantageous game after the big win is shown.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 36(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(B), a ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(C), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all determined and stopped at "5" to inform the player of the big win. It should be noted that the jackpot with the "5" symbol is assumed to be the 4R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(D), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying that a jackpot has been achieved. Here, a message image MS of "big hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. A jackpot game is a game in which a larger number of game balls than usual can be acquired by winning a game ball into the big winning hole 30, which is executed by so-called right-handed hitting. The explanation will be continued assuming that the state is changed to the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game.

In FIG. 36(E), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of how many rotations in the probability variation gaming state. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "7" to notify that a big win has occurred. It should be noted that the jackpot in the "7" pattern is assumed to be the 8R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(G), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying that a jackpot has been achieved. In this case, a message image MS reading "2nd jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. A jackpot game is a game in which a larger number of game balls than usual can be acquired by winning a game ball into the big winning hole 30, which is executed by so-called right-handed hitting. The explanation will be continued assuming that the state is changed to the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game.

In FIG. 36(H), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of how many rotations in the probability variation gaming state. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(I), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "7" to notify that a big win has occurred. It should be noted that the jackpot in the "7" pattern is assumed to be the 8R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(J), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is a effect for notifying that a jackpot has been achieved. In this case, a message image MS reading "big win 3rd time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. A jackpot game is a game in which a larger number of game balls than usual can be acquired by winning a game ball into the big winning hole 30, which is executed by so-called right-handed hitting. The explanation will be continued assuming that the state is changed to the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game.

In FIG. 36(K), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the left, middle, right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This fixed stop effect corresponds to the final variation in the probability variation gaming state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(L), a result effect is executed. The result effect is a effect for notifying the end of the variable probability game state and how many consecutive jackpots have been won. In this case, a message image MS reading "End of definite change 3 consecutive houses" is displayed. In addition, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from “state 1” to “state 3” due to three consecutive big hits. To make this change visible, a state display JH of "state 3 set high" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

[State change effect L of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect L of the setting suggestion effect. The setting-suggestion effect state change effect L is an effect that changes (transitions) the state of the setting-suggestion effect by executing the setting-suggestion effect a specified number of times.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variable start effect as shown in FIG. 37(A). The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle, right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4" and is fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(C), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Further, here, following the variable start effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggesting image SS saying "Is this a good setting?!" is displayed. Also, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(E), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Further, here, following the variable start effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Even number confirmed!" is displayed. Also, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "9", the middle effect symbol 8C is "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6" and is fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(G), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Further, here, following the variable start effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggesting image SS saying "4 or more settings are confirmed!" is displayed. Also, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is "0" and is fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(I), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(K), a variable start effect is executed. The variation start effect is a effect in which the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to change. Further, here, following the variable start effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion rendering is a rendering that makes a suggestion based on the setting information. Here, a setting suggesting image SS saying "Setting 5 or more is confirmed!" is displayed. As a result, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect reaches the specified number of times "4", so the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". Also, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During the high-speed fluctuation, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production for fixing and stopping the fluctuating production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6". Also, here, a state display JH of "state 3 setting high confidence" is performed so that the state of the setting suggestion effect has changed (transitioned) to "state 3".

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information is executed (FIGS. 35(L), 37(C), (E), (G) and (K)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting-suggestion performance states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting-suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting-suggestion performance (FIG. 22). Here, in particular, the history of the jackpot game executed based on the result of the lottery is stored, and based on the history of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is compared from the first state among the setting suggestion performance states to the first state. It is possible to execute upward transition processing for transitioning to a second state that can be an advantageous effect for the player (FIGS. 35(G), (J), and FIG. 36(L)). For example, in FIG. 35(G), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2". Therefore, the "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 2" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 35(J), the state of setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) from "state 2" to "state 3". Therefore, the "state 2" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". For example, when FIG. 35 (G) and (J) are combined, the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 3". Therefore, the "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 36(L), the state of setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 3". Therefore, the "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and the "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". According to this configuration, in addition to the success of the jackpot game, there is a greater possibility that the determination of the setting will be advantageous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the number of consecutive jackpot games exceeds a predetermined number of times, upward transition processing is executed (FIGS. 35(G), (J), and FIG. 36(L)). According to this configuration, in addition to the success of the jackpot game, there is a greater possibility that the determination of the setting will be advantageous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute downward transition processing for transitioning the setting suggestion effect state from the second state to the first state based on the history of the setting suggestion effect (FIGS. 37(C), (E) ( G) (K) (L)). For example, in FIG. 37(L), the state of setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) from "state 4" to "state 3". Therefore, the "state 4" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and the "state 3" corresponds to the "first state". According to this configuration, the setting-suggestion effect can be reliably executed in each state of the setting-suggestion effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the downward transition process is executed when the setting-suggestion effect is executed four times based on the history of the setting-suggestion effect (FIGS. 37(C), (E), (G), (K) ( L)). According to this configuration, the setting-suggestion effect can be reliably executed in each state of the setting-suggestion effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting-suggestion effect increases one by one (step-up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, and state 3→state 4. However, for example, the state 1→state 3, state 1→state 4, and state 2→state 4 may be configured to jump up by two or more.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect is configured to descend one by one (step down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, and state 2→state 1. However, for example, the state 4→state 1, the state 3→state 1, and the state 4→state 2 may be configured to jump down by two or more.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) based on the number of times the jackpot is won. On the other hand, when the jackpots of a specific type continue among the jackpots, the state of the setting suggestion effect may be changed (transitioned). For example, there are cases where non-probable variable jackpots are consecutive, and cases where maximum round jackpots are consecutive. At this time, not only the case of so-called consecutive games is regarded as a continuous big win, but also the big win with variable performance in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) may be counted as a continuous big win.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, when the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect reaches the prescribed number of four times, the state of the setting suggestion effect is lowered. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the specified number of times is dynamically changed. Specifically, it is conceivable to randomly set the prescribed number of times. Also, it is conceivable to set the specified number of times according to the setting information. For example, in the case of setting 6, the specified number of times is set to be large.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 4-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
A history of the jackpot game executed based on the result of the lottery is stored, and based on the history of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is compared with the first state from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states. It is possible to execute an upward transition process that transitions to a second state that can be an advantageous effect for the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4-1,
Based on the history of the jackpot game, when the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game exceeds a predetermined number of times, the upward transition process is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 4-1 or aspect 4-2,
Based on the history of the jackpot game, executing the upward transition process when a jackpot game of a specific type among the jackpot games is continuously executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-3,
downward transition processing for transitioning the setting suggestion effect state from the second state to the first state based on the history of the setting suggestion effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4-4,
executing the downward transition process when the setting-suggestion effect has been executed a predetermined number of times based on the history of the setting-suggestion effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 4-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect 4-5,
The predetermined number of times is predetermined corresponding to the setting information,
A gaming machine characterized by:

38 to 40, the state change effects M to O of the setting suggestion effects will be described below. In FIGS. 38 to 40, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing of the drawings. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. 40 is a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining O;

As described above, the state change effect of this setting suggestion effect is determined by the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect ( The state of the setting suggestion effect associated with the reliability rate) is defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and step up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. By jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes, and the player aims at state 4, which is a new game feature. is given. Of course, in the state of setting suggestion effect, as described above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4, It may also step down or jump down (eg, juamp down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, first, the state change effect M of the setting suggesting effect, the state change effect N of the setting suggesting effect, and the state change effect O of the setting suggesting effect will be described in order.

[State change effect M of setting suggestion effect]
The state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) upward once. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), and the speed is gradually increased from a low speed downward to a half from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the effect pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIGS. A variable icon 9C corresponding to the pattern 8R is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and up to four pending icons 9B can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the consumption is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), does not win and loses continuously, and only 49 performance patterns. is started and stopped and displayed to confirm the loss, and then the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. As shown in 38(A), the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the middle of the 50th rotation. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After the power is turned on, during the 50th rotation, the setting suggestion effect state display is started during the change, as shown in FIG. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a in a horizontally long rectangular shape. . The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps a portion of the right side of the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped with the part of the left side of the variable area of the pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "State 1" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH. A character image and a character image of "220 remaining times" are displayed in the lower part of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower parts. In other words, the information "state 1" in the character image "state 1 setting normal" is reflected as it is. The point that the suggestive effect state will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 220 times of variable effect (variable display) can be clearly indicated to the player. In the remaining 220 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion effect, and the point that "state 1" stays is clearly indicated to the player.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the state display region JH overlaps the downstream side of the variable region of the right performance symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the state display region JH is arranged on the frontmost side in the same manner as the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right production pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see. In addition, a dedicated state display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1" and the character image "Remaining 220 times". . As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH is difficult to see through the background image for the status display area. The background image for the status display area may be an opaque or semi-transparent image that can improve the visibility of the character image "status 1" and the character image "remaining 220 times". It can be a thing. In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH can be visually recognized through the background image for the state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 38(C), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by 1 and counted down (remaining 219 times). Incidentally, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A that has not been digested and is stocked is completely present. It will be in a state of not doing.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and after turning on the power, only 99 times (in other words, FIG. 38) In (B), only 49 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started and is displayed stopped, and the loss is confirmed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the 100th rotation (in other words, in FIG. 38B), it is in the 50th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. becomes). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 170 times, and "remaining 170 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After the power is turned on, during the 100th rotation, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM2 of setting suggestion rendering that can be notified) is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting is accurate" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image of "remaining 170 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is reflected as it is in the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", whereas by switching from the information "setting high accuracy" to the information "remaining 170 times" , the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 170 times of the variable effect (variable display). In the remaining 170 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion effect is changed to "state 2" and stays in "state 2".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. When the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "change state" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "change state" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the background image for state change is switched again to the background image for state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 38(E), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the number of remaining times displayed in the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, every time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is counted down by decreasing the value by 1 (remaining 169 times. In addition, the first pending display When the pending icon 9A displayed at the position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is moved to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and there is only one reserved icon 9A that has not been digested.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and after turning on the power, only 114 times (in other words, FIG. 38) In (B), only 14 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started and displayed stopped to confirm the loss, and then the second When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the 115th rotation (in other words, it is in the 15th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 38(D). becomes). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 155 times, and "remaining 155 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. Then, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested.

After the power is turned on, during the 115th rotation, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" during the change, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 38(G). Temporary stop display is performed with the number "7", and the middle production pattern 8C is in a state of continuing the variable production (variation display), and the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are the same number patterns (here, A leech is formed aligned with the number "7").

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the third When the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the state display area JH is also hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). ), a battle effect is started as shown in FIG. 38(H).

When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRB fights. Since the battle effect can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the battle effect is not started, the player has a high interest in the battle effect. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation, it is a win, and then a win game is started in which a profit is given to the player. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, the result is lost.

When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. "7") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed at the same timing. Hit is confirmed. When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are again displayed on the display screen 7a and the same symbol (here, the number "7") is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variation icon 9C and the variation display are further performed. The position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a, while the status display area JH remains hidden on the display screen 7a. (a state in which it remains hidden from the display screen 7a). It should be noted that the state display area JH is also displayed on the display screen 7a when the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the pending icons 9A, the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the same pattern (in this case, the number "7") is not aligned, and is temporarily stopped. After that, it is stopped and displayed at the same timing, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and the failure is confirmed. When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are again displayed on the display screen 7a and the same symbol (here, the number "7") is not aligned and temporarily stopped, the variation icon 9C, The variable display position 9Cd, all the pending icons 9A, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the status display area JH is displayed on the display screen 7a. A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), does not win and loses continuously, and "state 2" is displayed in the state display area JH. The remaining number of times and are displayed. In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining number of variable effects (variable display). In this remaining number of variable effects (variable display), the state of setting suggestion effects may change. Here, the player is clearly informed that the "state 2" stays as the state of the setting suggestion effect.

When the winning is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the winning game is started in which a profit is awarded to the player. When the winning game is started, the left-handed game is switched to the right-handed game, and the player performs the game of entering the game ball into the first big winning hole 30.例文帳に追加When the winning game ends, the game of right-handed hitting is continued, and when the game of left-handed hitting is performed, there are only three reserved icons 9A that have not been digested. of the pending icon 9A is digested. Then, when the player plays a game (so-called right-handed game) in which the game ball is entered into the second start hole 21, the number of reserved icons 9B that are not digested and are stocked increases.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 21 (performing a game of so-called right-handed hitting), and the game does not hit and loses continuously, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is performed only 24 times. When the suspension icon 9B displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C after that, the variation performance of the performance pattern (variation display) is performed. is started. As a result, after the end of the winning game, the 25th rotation is in progress.

When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Bd moves to the third pending display position 9Bd. Then, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd. Then, only three pending icons 9B are stocked without being digested.

After the end of the winning game, during the 25th rotation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM3 of a setting suggestion effect that can be suggested (notified) has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

When the state display image JM3 of setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area displayed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the lower left corner side of the display screen 7a. , and a character image of "state change" is displayed in the state display area JH. At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

Although the state display area JH overlaps the downstream side of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display area JH is arranged at the foremost side in the same manner as the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the left production pattern 8L and does not become difficult to see. In the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower left corner side of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image "state 3" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image "remaining 130 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 3" in the character image "state 3 setting high confidence" is reflected as it is. , the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 130 times of the variable effect (variable display). In the remaining 130 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion presentation will transition to "state 3" and stay in "state 3".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. When the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "change state" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "change state" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the background image for state change is switched again to the background image for state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 38(K), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the reservation icon 9B displayed at the first reservation display position 9Bd moves to the variation display position 9Cd in order to start the next variation, the variation performance (variation display) of the performance pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9B displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd moves to the second pending display position 9Bd, and the pending icon 9B displayed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd. , and only two pending icons 9B are stocked without being digested. In this state, when one game ball enters the second starting port 21, the pending icon 9B is displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd, and the pending icon 9B is stocked without being digested. is in a state where only three exist.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, as shown in FIG. , and the number of remaining times displayed in the status display area JH is displayed as "remaining 129 times". That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by one and counted down.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is awarded a profit is started.

When the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the second starting hole 21 (when playing the so-called right-handed game), the number of revolutions is constant for right-handed hitting until the next win is confirmed. A state display image of setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a every 25 rotations. The state display image of the setting suggesting effect here may be a state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect that can suggest (inform) the player that it is in "state 1", or it may be "state 2". In some cases, the state display image JM2 may be a state display image JM2 of a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that it is "state 3", or setting capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that it is "state 3". It may be a state display image JM3 of a suggestive effect, or it may be a state display image of a set suggestive effect capable of suggesting (informing) the player that it is "state 4".

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 for a predetermined number of times (time saving number of times) (performing a so-called right-handed game). performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area displayed on the lower left corner side of the display screen 7a, is displayed. When the remaining number of times displayed in the lower right corner of the screen 7a becomes zero after that, "remaining zero times" is displayed, the display of the setting suggesting effect state is ended, and the state is displayed. The display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a. When the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH becomes zero and the state display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggesting performance is initialized to "state 1".

In the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the second starting hole 21 (when playing the so-called right-handed game), the next win is confirmed. Until then, the state display image of the setting suggestive effect is displayed on the display screen 7a every 25 rotations, which is a constant number of rotations for right-handed hitting. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the first start hole 20 (when playing a game called left-handed hitting), until the hit is confirmed, the left-handed hitting constant rotation is performed. A state display image of setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a every 50 rotations, which is the number. In this way, 25 rotations, which is the constant number of rotations for right-handed hitting, is smaller than 50 rotations, which is the constant number of rotations for left-handed hitting. In other words, when the win is confirmed, the number of revolutions at which the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a changes.

In addition, a game in which a player enters a game ball into the second starting port 21 (a so-called right-handed game) is changed to a game in which a player enters a game ball into the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game). When it returns again, the state display image of the setting suggesting effect is displayed on the display screen 7a every 50 rotations, which is the constant number of rotations for left-handed hitting.

38B, 38D, and 38J are determined in the state transition process shown in FIG. Based on this, it is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Further, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect, for example, when the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment) in FIG. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestive effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "setting is accurate". At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , the character image "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and the character image "remaining 220 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. However, when the character image "state 2 set high accuracy" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "state 3 set high accuracy" You may jump up to "Shin". By doing so, the contents of the character image "state 2 setting accurate" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the character image displayed when moving to the state display area JH are changed. Therefore, the player's line of sight is not only displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also displayed when moving to the state display area JH. Since it is possible to direct the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[State change effect N of setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern once moves upward in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) and then slowly (low speed) moves ( In other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move, and then the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the effect pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start port 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), does not win and loses continuously, and only 24 performance patterns. is started and stopped and displayed to confirm the loss, and then the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. As shown in 39(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the process of changing at the 25th rotation. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After the power is turned on, during the 25th rotation, the setting suggestion effect state display is started during the change, as shown in FIG. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a in a horizontally long rectangular shape. . The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps a portion of the right side of the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped with the part of the left side of the variable area of the pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "State 1" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH. A character image and a character image of "220 remaining times" are displayed in the lower part of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower parts. In other words, the information "state 1" in the character image "state 1 setting normal" is reflected as it is. The point that the suggestive effect state will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 220 times of variable effect (variable display) can be clearly indicated to the player. In the remaining 220 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion effect, and the point that "state 1" stays is clearly indicated to the player.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the state display area JH overlaps the downstream side of the variable area of the right effect symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the state display area JH is arranged on the frontmost side like the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right production pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see. In addition, a dedicated state display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1" and the character image "Remaining 220 times". . As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH is difficult to see through the background image for the state display area. The background image for the status display area may be an opaque or semi-transparent image that can improve the visibility of the character image "status 1" and the character image "remaining 220 times". It can be a thing. In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH can be visually recognized through the background image for the state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by 1 and counted down (remaining 219 times). Incidentally, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A that has not been digested and is stocked is completely present. It will be in a state of not doing.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and after turning on the power, only 39 times (in other words, FIG. 39). In (B), only 14 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started and displayed stopped to confirm the loss, and then the second When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, the 40th rotation is in progress (in other words, the 15th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39B). becomes). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 205 times, and "remaining 205 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After the power is turned on, during the 40th rotation, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM2 of setting suggestion rendering that can be notified) is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting is accurate" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image of "remaining 205 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is reflected as it is in the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", whereas by switching from the information "setting high accuracy" to the information "remaining 205 times" , the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 205 times of the variable effect (variable display). In the remaining 205 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion presentation will transition to "state 2" and stay in "state 2".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. When the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "change state" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "change state" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the background image for state change is switched again to the background image for state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 39(E), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by 1 (remaining 204 times). When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is changed. It moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and after turning on the power, only 69 times (in other words, FIG. 39). In (D), only 29 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started and displayed stopped to confirm the loss, and then the second When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the 70th rotation (in other words, it is in the 30th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39(D). becomes). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 175 times, and "remaining 175 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. Then, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested.

After the power is turned on, during the 70th rotation, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect that can be notified) has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is again displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 1 set normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves toward the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves while reducing the size of the character by pressing and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "status change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. A character image of "state 1" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image of "remaining 175 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 1" in the character image "state 1 setting normal" is reflected as it is. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the suggestive effect state is displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 175 times of variable effect (variable display). In the remaining 175 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will continue to be the state of the setting suggestion effect.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. Note that when the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "state change" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "state change" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the state change background image is switched to the state display area background image.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 39(G), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. Then, the number of remaining times displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by 1 (remaining 174 times). When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad is changed. Moved to the second reserved display position 9Ad, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moved to the first reserved display position 9Ad, and two reserved icons 9A were stocked without being digested. only exists.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and after turning on the power, only 84 times (in other words, FIG. 39). In (F), only 14 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestive effect is displayed) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started and displayed stopped to confirm the loss, and then the second When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the 85th rotation (in other words, it is in the 15th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39F). becomes). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 160 times, and "remaining 160 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After the power is turned on, during the 85th rotation, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can be notified) has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is again displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 1 setting accurate" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image "remaining 160 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is reflected as it is in the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", whereas by switching from the information "setting high accuracy" to the information "remaining 160 times" , the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 160 times of the variable effect (variable display). In the remaining 160 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion effect is changed to "state 2" and stays in "state 2".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. Note that when the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "state change" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "state change" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the state change background image is switched to the state display area background image.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 39(I), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "0", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the number of remaining times displayed in the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. In other words, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by 1 and counted down (remaining 159 times). When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A that has not been digested and is stocked exists. It will be in a state of not doing.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and after turning on the power, only 124 times (in other words, FIG. 39) In (H), only 39 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestive effect is displayed) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started and displayed stopped to confirm the loss, and then the second When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, the 125th rotation is in progress (in other words, the 40th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39(H) is in progress. becomes). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 120 times, and "remaining 120 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After the power is turned on, during the 125th rotation, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM3 of setting suggestion rendering that can be notified) is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 3" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image of "remaining 120 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 3" in the character image "state 3 setting high confidence" is reflected as it is, whereas by switching from the information "setting high confidence" to the information "remaining 120 times" , the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 120 times of the variable effect (variable display). In the remaining 120 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion presentation will transition to "state 3" and stay in "state 3".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. When the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "change state" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "change state" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the background image for state change is switched again to the background image for state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 39(K), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. In other words, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by 1 and counted down (remaining 119 times). When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is changed. It moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is in the 126th rotation (in other words, in FIG. 39(J), it is in the 1st rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed). becomes). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 39L, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 119 times, and "remaining 119 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After the power is turned on, it is during the 126th rotation, and if the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the failure is confirmed. When the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in line with the patterns of the same number, the winning is confirmed, and thereafter, the winning game in which the player is given a profit starts. It will be done.

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and when the player continues to lose without winning, the remaining number of times is displayed in the state display area JH. becomes zero, "remaining zero times" is displayed, the display of the state of setting suggestion effect is ended, and the state display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a. When the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH becomes zero and the state display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggesting performance is initialized to "state 1".

In the state change effect N of the setting suggesting effect, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first start hole 20 (when the player is playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), the state of the setting suggesting effect is displayed. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the number of rotations (the number of consecutive times that a loss is confirmed) at which the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started and the stop display is performed. Since this number of rotations may increase or decrease, it has randomness and is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 .

39(B), (D), (F), (H), and (J) in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what is determined in the transition process.

In addition, in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first start hole 20 (when the player is playing a so-called left-handed game), the setting suggestion effect is performed. Although the number of rotations at which the state display image is displayed on the display screen 7a is random, the number of rotations may be increased, for example, each time the state of the setting suggestion effect is stepped up or jumped up. In this way, the number of rotations itself can be provided to the player as a suggestive effect of the setting information. In addition, the player who sees the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH, which is the number of rotations, can contribute to discovering the rule between the state of the setting suggestion effect and the number of rotations by himself/herself.

In addition, in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect, for example, in FIG. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestive effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "setting is accurate". At this time, the character image "state 1 setting accurate" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , the character image "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and the character image "remaining 160 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. However, when the character image "state 2 set high accuracy" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "state 3 set high accuracy" You may jump up to "Shin". By doing this, the contents of the character image "state 2 setting accurate" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the character image displayed when moving to the state display area JH are changed. Therefore, the player's line of sight is not only displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also displayed when moving to the state display area JH. Since it is possible to direct the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[State change effect O of setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern once moves upward in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) and then slowly (low speed) moves ( In other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move, and then the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. It changes to a state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first holding display area, the holding icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four holding display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four holding icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Briefly describing the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. ing. For example, of the six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, an empty box icon, a red spherical icon, a green spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow The (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the treasure box icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the 4th highest, the green spherical icon is the 5th highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon is the 6th highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon is the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing.

Note that the icon of the treasure box usually has a closed lid, and the lid may change from the closed state to the open state. When the lid of the treasure box icon changes from the closed state to the open state, the probability of hitting the treasure box icon becomes higher and the lid is kept open. Also, when the lid of the treasure chest icon changes from closed to open, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change or be maintained, changing to another icon or returning to the original icon. do.

In addition, the background image (referred to as "special background image") used in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect is a special image that is not included in the normal background image in addition to the normal background image. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an undersea image, or an underground image. The special background images are special images such as space images, spacecraft images, base images, and game hall images. The normal background image and the special background image may be still images or moving images.

When the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation of the reservation icon 9A. While the display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9B exists during the process and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the digestion is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. . Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is moved to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. The variable icon 9C and the two pending icons 9A are white spherical icons.

After that, during the change, as shown in FIG. 40(B), the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is changed from the white spherical hold icon 9A to the treasure box hold icon 9A. Change. At this time, the lid of the treasure box holding icon 9A is in a closed state.

After that, during the change, as shown in FIG. 40(C), the lid of the reserve icon 9A of the treasure box displayed at the second reserve display position 9Ad changes from the closed state to the open state. Triggered by this, the state display of the setting suggesting effect is started, and the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1" is displayed. It has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps in the front-rear direction with a part of the region on the right side of the variation region of the left effect symbol 8L, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect symbol 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped in the front-rear direction with a part of the left side of the variation area of the pattern 8R, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see. The city image HG1 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" in the status display area JH is displayed. , and a character image of "80 times remaining" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH, divided into upper and lower parts. In other words, the information "state 1" in the character image "state 1 setting normal" is reflected as it is. It is "state 1", and in the remaining 80 times of variable performance (variable display) from the start to the end of the state display of the setting suggestion performance, the state of the setting suggestion performance may change. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the will stay.

Further, when the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the treasure box with the lid opened displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad is reserved. The icon 9A returns to the white spherical hold icon 9A (changes to hold).

In the period of the remaining 80 times of variable production (variable display), the state of setting suggestion production may change, and the frequency of setting suggestion production associated with the state of setting suggestion production, here "state 1" ( The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability of the setting-suggestion effect (reliability rate). Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the state display region JH overlaps the downstream side of the variable region of the right performance symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the state display region JH is arranged on the frontmost side in the same manner as the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right production pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. In addition, a dedicated state display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1" and the character image "remaining 80 times". . As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH is difficult to see through the background image for the status display area. The background image for the status display area may be an opaque or semi-transparent image that can improve the visibility of the character image "status 1" and the character image "remaining 80 times". It can be a thing. In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH can be visually recognized through the background image for the state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 40(D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the number of remaining times displayed in the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by one and counted down. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is changed. It moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and is in a state where only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), does not win and loses continuously, and only 44 times after the state display of the setting suggestion performance is started. (That is, only 44 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestive effect is displayed in FIG. 40(C)) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started and displayed stopped, and the loss is confirmed. After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the start of the state display of the setting suggestion effect, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the 45th rotation. during eye movement). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 40(E), the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 35, and "Remaining 35 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. Then, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. The city image HG1 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

After the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, when the 45th rotation is in progress, as shown in FIG. The icon 9A undergoes a hold change from a white spherical hold icon 9A to a treasure box hold icon 9A. At this time, the lid of the treasure box holding icon 9A is in a closed state. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, during the change, as shown in FIG. 40(G), the lid of the reserve icon 9A of the treasure box displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad changes from the closed state to the open state. Triggered by this, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", is displayed on the display screen having a horizontally long rectangular shape. It is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting is accurate" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image of "remaining 35 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is reflected as it is in the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", whereas by switching from the information "setting high accuracy" to the information "remaining 35 times" , is currently in "state 2", and in the remaining 35 fluctuation effects (variable display) from the start to the end of the state display of the setting suggestion effect, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of .

Further, when the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the treasure box with the lid opened displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad is reserved. The icon 9A returns to the white spherical hold icon 9A (changes to hold).

In the period of the remaining 35 variable effects (variable display), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change, and the setting suggestion effect state, here, the frequency of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" ( The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability of the setting-suggestion effect (reliability rate). Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. When the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "change state" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "change state" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the background image for state change is switched again to the background image for state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 40(H), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the number of remaining times displayed in the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by one and counted down. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad is changed. Moved to the second reserved display position 9Ad, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moved to the first reserved display position 9Ad, and two reserved icons 9A were stocked without being digested. only exists.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a game of so-called left-handed hitting), does not win and loses continuously, and only 64 times after the state display of the setting suggestion performance is started. (That is, only 64 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestive effect is displayed in FIG. 40(C)) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started and displayed stopped, and the loss is confirmed. After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the state display of the setting suggesting effect is started, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is being displayed in the 65th rotation. during eye movement). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 40(I), the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is 15, and "remaining 15 times" is displayed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. The city image HG1 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

During the 65th rotation after the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, the message image MS1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a during the change. (Appear). This message image MS1 is a background image change forewarning effect, and is an image announcing a background image change forewarning. ing. That is, the message image MS1 is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the area on the right side of the variable area of the left production pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the left production pattern 8L and is not difficult to see. In addition, the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS1 straddles the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the left and right direction and overlaps the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the front and back direction, but the message image MS1 is the middle effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the left side of the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, but the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the right effect symbol 8R. It is not obstructed by and does not become difficult to see. Even at this time, the city image HG1 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

A background image for the message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS1, and a character image saying "The background image may change!" is arranged in front of the background image for the message image. ing. The background image for the message image is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image saying "The background image may change!". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 is difficult to see through the background image for the message image. Note that the background image for the message image may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image saying "The background image may change!". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 can be visually recognized through the background image for the message image. When the character image "The background image may change!", which is the message image MS1, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the voice "The background image may change!" flowing. As a result, it is possible to announce the change of the background image even in the voice.

When the message image MS1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS1 disappears from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 40(J). Then, the display screen 7a is switched to the spacecraft interior image HG2 as a special background image instead of the normal background image. Triggered by this, a setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 3" is displayed on the display screen in a horizontally long rectangular shape. It is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of 7a. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image "state 3" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and a character image "remaining 15 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 3" in the character image "state 3 setting high confidence" is reflected as it is, whereas by switching from the information "setting high confidence" to the information "remaining 15 times" , is currently in "state 3", and in the remaining 15 fluctuation effects (variable display) from the start to the end of the state display of the setting suggestion effect, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of .

In the period of the remaining 15 times of variable production (variable display), the state of setting suggestion production may change, and the frequency of setting suggestion production associated with the state of setting suggestion production, here "state 3" ( The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability of the setting-suggestion effect (reliability rate). Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

Although the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears, the background image for the state display area described above continues to be arranged in the state display area JH. Note that when the background image for the state display area is switched to a dedicated background image for state change (not shown) when the character image "state change" is displayed in the state display area JH, the character image "state change" is displayed. disappears from the state display area JH, the state change background image is switched to the state display area background image.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 40(K), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. , and the number of remaining times displayed in the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is decreased by one. That is, each time the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH is decreased by one and counted down. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A that has not been digested and is stocked exists. It will be in a state of not doing.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), does not win and loses continuously, and only 79 times after the state display of the setting suggestion performance is started. (That is, only 79 rotations after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestive effect is displayed in FIG. 40(C)) The variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started and stopped, and the loss is confirmed. After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. As a result, after the start of the state display of the setting suggestion effect, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the 80th rotation. during eye movement). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 40(L), the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH becomes zero, and "remaining 0 times" is displayed. Even at this time, the spacecraft interior image HG2 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a special background image.

Furthermore, after the state display of the setting suggesting effect is started, when the 80th rotation is in progress, the message image MS2 is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a in a horizontally long rectangular shape during the change. be (appear). This message image MS2 includes a character image of "Terminate status display" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The message image MS2 has the same configuration as the message image MS1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that the background image for the message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner area of the oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS2. When the message image MS2, that is, the character image "Terminate the status display" is displayed on the display screen 7a, the voice "Terminate the status display", which is the content of the character image, is played from the speaker 67. It's like As a result, it is possible to tell the player that the state display is finished by voice.

When the message image MS2 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS2 and the status display area JH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image HG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image. , and is displayed again.

When the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH becomes zero and the state display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggesting performance is initialized to "state 1".

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is awarded a profit is started.

In the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect, when the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first start hole 20 (when playing a so-called left-handed game), the holding icon of the treasure box is displayed. When the hold change occurs and the lid of the hold icon 9A of the treasure box changes from the closed state to the open state, the state display of the setting suggesting effect is started, and the state display image of the setting suggesting effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is designed to be This hold change is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). As a result, the timing at which the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started and the timing at which the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a can be given randomness. Note that the icon of the treasure box may change not only with respect to the reserve icon 9A but also with respect to the variable icon 9C.

In addition, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect, when the message image MS1, which is the background image change notice effect and is an image announcing the background image change notice, is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image being set is switched from the normal background image to the special background image, and the state display image of the setting suggesting effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. The switching of the background image is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Thus, by giving randomness to the timing at which the background image displayed on the display screen 7a switches from the normal background image to the special background image, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a at the timing. It can be random.

In the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images and message images of each setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what is determined in the process.

Further, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect, for example, in FIG. The state display image JM3 of the setting suggesting effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "SETTING HIGH". At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , the character image "state 3" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and the character image "remaining 15 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. However, when the character image "state 3 set high" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "state 4 set high" You may jump up to “Conviction”. By doing this, the contents of the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the character image displayed when moving to the state display area JH are changed. Therefore, the player's line of sight is not only displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also displayed when the player moves to the state display area JH. Since it is possible to direct the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the state change effects M to O of the setting suggesting effects will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 38, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 39, and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. At the time of lottery (lottery of 'hit' or 'losing') associated with the ball (entrance of the game ball into the first starting port 20), the lottery is performed with the lottery probability according to the setting information by referring to the setting information. A setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect determination process in FIG. 24) for making a suggestion based on setting information can be executed, and there are a plurality of setting suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting suggestion effect are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestive production states. It is possible to execute transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) for transitioning from the first state of the setting suggesting effect states to the second state in which the setting suggesting effect is more advantageous to the player than the first state. It is possible. By executing this transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23), for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. , in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. , "state 1 setting normal" is changed to "state 3 setting high reliability". According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the transition processing of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggesting performance states to the second state in which the setting suggesting performance can be a more advantageous performance for the player than the first state. Therefore, in addition to informing the player of the winning or losing result of the lottery, a new game in which the player plays a game and aims to transition from the first state to the second state. sex can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. When the specified number of times of 100 is reached, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed at a specific number of times such as 50 times and 100 times (in other words, a specific number of times such as every 50 times). It is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestive effect based on the number of times of pattern variable effect (variable display) (the number of lotteries).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. When the specified number of times is reached, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed, and after the change is stopped and displayed, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 23, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and the specific number of 30 times is reached in the state change effect N of the setting suggestive effect shown in FIG. Then, the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed, and when the specific number of 15 times is reached in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. Transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed, and when a specific number of times of 40 is reached in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed, and the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed by changing the specified number of times to a random number of times. there is According to this configuration, since it is possible to change the specific number of times (state transition processing in FIG. 23) to a random number of times to execute the transition processing, the number of times of the variation production (variation display) of the production pattern It is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect based on (the number of lotteries).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. ) is completed, the transition process can be executed by changing a specific number of times. Until the win is achieved, that is, in a state in which the loss continues without winning, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. The number of lotteries) reaches a specific number of times (in other words, every 50 times) of 50 times or 100 times (in other words, every 50 times), the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. When the game ends, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 23 state transition processing) can be executed. According to this configuration, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed by changing the specific number of times to a random number after winning (that is, after the winning game is finished). Therefore, it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestive effect based on the number of variable effects (variable display) of the effect symbols (the number of lotteries).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. When the icon changes from the closed state to the open state (when the display mode of the specific icon changes), transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed. In the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. When the hold change to the hold icon of the treasure box changes and the lid of the hold icon 9A of the treasure box changes from the closed state to the open state, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed with this as a trigger, and a setting suggesting effect is performed. is displayed on the display screen 7a. This pending change is determined by a lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). As a result, the timing at which the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is started can be given randomness. According to this configuration, the reserved icon 9A becomes the treasure box reserved icon 9A (specific icon) by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91), and the lid of the treasure box reserved icon 9A is closed. Since it is possible to execute transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) when the state changes to the open state (when the display mode of the specific icon changes), the sub control board 90 (effect control A lottery (in other words, sorting by lottery) by the microcomputer 91) can perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 1 background image) is switched to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), which is a special background image different from the background image), and the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed at the transition of the background image. can be done. When the message image MS1, which is a background image change notice effect and is an image announcing the background image change notice, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a is changed to the normal background image (the first background image). background image) to a special background image (second background image), the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed, and the state display image of the setting suggesting effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. . The switching of the background image is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). As a result, the timing at which the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is started can be given randomness. According to this configuration, a special background image different from the city image HG1 (first background image) is selected from the city image HG1 (first background image), which is a normal background image, by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). A background image change notice effect is performed to switch to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), and transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed at the transition of the background image. A lottery (in other words, sorting by lottery) of the sub-control board 90 (the production control microcomputer 91) can perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion production.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 38 and the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. do. In the setting suggestion effect state change effect M of FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that it will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the variable performance (variable display) of the round. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 variable effects (variable display) is established, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. In the setting suggestion effect state change effect N of FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that it will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the variable performance (variable display) of the round. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 variable effects (variable display) is established, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. According to this configuration, the setting-suggestion effect state, which is one state transitioned by the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23), changes (transitions) over a limited period of time until the end condition is satisfied. , and the display of the current setting suggestive effect state can be terminated by satisfaction of the end condition.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 38 and the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. ) reaches a certain number of times, ie, 220 times, the display of the current setting suggestive effect state (display of the current setting suggestive effect state) is terminated. In other words, it is possible to display one state transitioned by the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23) until it reaches 220 times, which is the fixed number of times. In the setting suggestion effect state change effect M of FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that it will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the variable performance (variable display) of the round. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 variable effects (variable display) is established, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. In the setting suggestion effect state change effect N of FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that it will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the variable performance (variable display) of the round. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 variable effects (variable display) is established, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. According to this configuration, when the number of variable effects (variable display) of the effect pattern (the number of lotteries) reaches 220, which is a fixed number, the state of the current setting suggesting effect is displayed (the current setting suggesting effect state is displayed). display) can be terminated, and one state (current setting suggestion effect state (current setting suggestion effect state )) can be displayed, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player the stay in the state by displaying the number of times the game ends.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the state change effects M to O of the setting suggesting effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. Background image) is changed to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), which is a special background image different from the background image), and transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed at the transition of the background image. I was able to do it. However, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed with a comment announcement effect in which a comment (comment image) is displayed as a trigger. This comment notice effect is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). As a result, the timing at which the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is started can be given randomness. According to this configuration, the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed with the comment advance notice effect in which the comment (comment image) is displayed by the lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) as a trigger. can be performed, control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect can be performed by a lottery (in other words, sorting by lottery) of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. Background image) is changed to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), which is a special background image different from the background image), and transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed at the transition of the background image. I was able to do it. However, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed when the second movable accessory 15, which is a movable body, moves from the retracted position to the advanced position. The movable body effect in which the second movable accessory 15, which is a movable body, moves from the retracted position to the advanced position is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). The second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the first mode (retracted state at the escape position), and stops at the center of the display screen 7a as an advanced position (deployed position). (Second aspect). The second movable accessory 15 can be moved to the retracted position by moving (retracting) upward from the second mode (advanced state at the advanced position), and can stand still there. there is Also, when the movable accessory (movable body) such as the second movable accessory 15 is activated, the variable performance (variable display) of the plurality of performance patterns ends compared to when the movable accessory (movable body) is not activated. It suggests to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is high that the winning will occur after the display (that is, after a plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the second movable accessory 15 and other movable accessories (movable bodies). As a result, the timing at which the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is started can be given randomness. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) triggered by the movable body effect by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). A lottery (in other words, sorting by lottery) of the sub-control board 90 (the production control microcomputer 91) can perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion production. The movable body may be provided on the front frame 53 in addition to the movable body such as the second movable accessory 15 that is provided on the game board 2 .

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 38 and the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. ) reaches a certain number of times, ie, 220 times, the display of the current setting suggestive effect state (display of the current setting suggestive effect state) is terminated. However, the fixed number of times may increase as the probability of transition from the first state to the second state increases. For example, when the constant number of revolutions is set to one of 55, 110, and 220, the probability of transition from the first state to the second state is lowest when the constant number of revolutions is set to 55, When the constant rotation speed is set to 110 times, the probability of transition from the first state to the second state is higher than when the constant rotation speed is set to 55 times. It has the highest probability of transitioning from the state to the second state. In this way, for example, the higher the probability of transition from "state 1 setting normal" (first state) to "state 2 setting high probability" (second state), the more the fixed number of remaining times. The higher the probability of transition from "state 2 setting high accuracy" (first state) to "state 3 setting high reliability" (second state), the greater the fixed number of remaining times. As a result, since the setting is high when transitioning from the first state to the second state, by increasing the fixed number of times, which is the remaining number of times, the fixed number of rotations itself can be used as a suggestion of the setting information. .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, state change effects M of the setting suggestion effects of FIGS. 38(B), (D), and (J), FIGS. In the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of (J) and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect of FIGS. At this time, the content of the state display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played from the speaker 67 as a voice. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1 normal setting". good too. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the state change (transition result) of the setting suggestion effect by voice.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. When the hold change occurs and the cover of the hold icon 9A of the treasure box changes from the closed state to the open state, the state display of the setting suggesting effect is started with this as a trigger. However, instead of the icon of the treasure box, for example, one of friendly characters and enemy characters appearing in the battle production appears as an icon, and after that, when the size of the character changes or the pose of the character changes. Occasionally, this may be used as a trigger to start the state display of the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can be (informed) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed except for the character image "state 2 setting accurate". The size of the characters is reduced toward the state display area JH where the character image "State 2: Set Accurate" is formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a by gradually becoming transparent and disappearing from the screen 7a. When it finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH, and "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH. and a character image of "50 times remaining" are displayed in upper and lower stages in the lower part of the state display area JH. However, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggesting effect is actually "state 3" but is intentionally "state 2". After that, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect gradually disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", and "state 2 setting high accuracy" disappears from the display screen 7a. When the character image moves toward the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while reducing the size of the character and finally moves to the state display area JH, the state display area JH is displayed. , disappears from the state display area JH, the character image "state 3" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and the character image "remaining 50 times" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. may be displayed separately in upper and lower stages. In this way, there is a case where the transition result of the state change is not finalized until it is displayed in the state display area JH. Instead, it is possible to provide the player with an effect as if there was a transition of the state change after the character image was moved. It should be noted that this can be applied to the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 39 and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect of FIG.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 38, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 39, and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. When the remaining number of times to be displayed in the area JH becomes zero, "remaining zero times" is displayed, the display of the state of setting suggestion effect is finished, and the state display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a. The state of the setting suggestion effect was initialized to "state 1". However, it is also possible to step down the state of the setting suggestion effect by one at the time when "remaining zero times" is displayed instead of "state 1". For example, when the state of the setting suggestion effect at the time when "remaining zero times" is displayed is "state 3", it may be set to "state 2" which is one step down from "state 3". It should be noted that when the state of the setting suggestion effect at the time when "remaining zero times" is displayed is "state 1", it becomes "state 1".

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 38, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 39, and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. The state of setting suggestion effect (one of “state 1” to “state 4”) in the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 provided. was supposed to be displayed. However, instead of the image display device 7, the state of the setting suggesting effect may be displayed in the display area of another image display device provided on the game board 2, or the sub-display device provided on the door frame 53 may be displayed. The screen may display the state of the setting suggestion effect. The other image display device provided on the game board 2 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. For example, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decorative body 10 located at the lower right of the image display device 7, the image display device is provided in the center of this decorative member. The sub-display device is composed of a right sub-display device, a left sub-display device, and an upper sub-display device. The right sub-display device is provided on the right side of the front frame 53 , the left sub-display device is provided on the left side of the front frame 53 , and the upper sub-display device is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53 . The right sub-display device and the left sub-display device are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display device is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53 . The sub-display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The state of setting suggestion effect is displayed on one of the right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device, which constitute the sub-display device. As another image display device provided on the game board 2, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decoration body 10, a predetermined image is printed in advance instead of the image display device provided on the center decoration body 10. and a built-in backlight (plurality of light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. Thereby, a predetermined image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members on which a predetermined image is printed may be provided so that the predetermined image corresponding to the emitted color of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) may be displayed respectively. In this case, the predetermined images printed on the plurality of printing members are assumed to be different images. In this way, the luminescent colors of the built-in backlight (light-emitting means) can be, for example, red (first light-emitting means), green (second light-emitting means), blue (third light-emitting means), white (fourth light-emitting means). light emitting means), a predetermined image printed on the first printing member in red light when the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) emits red light (the first predetermined image "State 1 ”) is displayed, and a predetermined image printed on the second printing member in green light when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light (“state 2” which is a second predetermined image) is displayed. ) is displayed, and a predetermined image printed on the third printing member with blue light emission when the built-in backlight (third light emitting means) emits blue light (“state 3”, which is the third predetermined image) is displayed, and a predetermined image (“state 4”, which is a fourth predetermined image) printed on the fourth printing member in white light when the built-in backlight (fourth light emitting means) emits white light is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, by emitting light from the built-in backlight, it is possible to display the state of setting suggestion effect (one of "state 1" to "state 4") as a predetermined image. Of course, when the built-in backlight is turned off, the predetermined image is not displayed, so the state of the setting suggestion effect at this time (one of "state 1" to "state 4") is hidden.

[Modification 9]
38, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 39, and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. A part may not be provided, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 5-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
A transition process of transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion effect states to a second state in which the setting suggestion effect is more advantageous to the player than the first state is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-1,
When the number of times of lottery reaches a specific number of times, the transition process is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-2,
changing the specific number of times to a random number of times and executing the transition process;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-2,
After the result of the lottery is a win and a game state advantageous to the player ends, the transition process is executed by changing the specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-4,
executing the transition process when the pending icon becomes a specific icon and the display mode of the specific icon changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-5,
A background image change notice effect for switching from a first background image to a second background image different from the first background image is performed, and the transition process is executed at the transition of the background image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-6,
Execute the transition process with the comment notice effect in which the comment is displayed as a trigger,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-7,
When the number of lotteries drawn reaches a certain number of times, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state is terminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 5-9]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-9,
In the transition process, the fixed number of times increases as the probability of transition from the first state to the second state increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects P to Q of the setting suggestion effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. 41 to 43, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. 41 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 41, and FIG. 43 is a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the state change production|presentation Q of production|presentation.

As described above, the state change effect of this setting suggestion effect is determined by the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect ( The state of the setting suggestion effect associated with the reliability rate) is defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and step up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. By jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes, and the player aims at state 4, which is a new game feature. is given. Of course, in the state of setting suggestion effect, as described above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4, It may also step down or jump down (eg, juamp down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, first, the state change effect P of the setting suggesting effect and the state change effect Q of the setting suggesting effect will be described in order. The state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect and the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect are permitted by the CPU 92 of the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 held in the built-in RAM of the RTC 95 of the effect control microcomputer 91. Information, start and end information, and current date and time information (hereinafter referred to as "current date and time information") are acquired, and the operation is performed based on these acquired various information. Here, since the state change effect permission information is set to "ON", the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect can be performed. It is assumed that the time period information is set among the information and the specific date information.

The state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect is performed at regular time intervals (in a plurality of time zones) from 10:00 until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. However, the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect is different in that it is performed from 18:00 to 22:00 (in a single time zone).

[State change effect P of setting suggestion effect]
The state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the upper side. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, the opaque state is changed to half. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the performance pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the reservation icon 9A displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad. moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started as shown in FIG. 41(A). Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the change, when the current time reaches 10:00, until 10:45 (that is, for 45 minutes), as shown in FIG. A setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the effect state display is started and that the setting suggesting effect state is "state 1" has a horizontally long rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps a portion of the right side of the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped with the part of the left side of the variable area of the pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 10:45. It has become. During the period until 10:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion effect, and the point that "state 1" stays is clearly indicated to the player.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the state display region JH overlaps the downstream side of the variable region of the right performance symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the state display region JH is arranged on the frontmost side in the same manner as the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right production pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. In addition, a dedicated state display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH is difficult to see through the background image for the status display area. The background image for the status display area may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image of "status 1". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH can be visually recognized through the background image for the state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 41(C), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. As a result, the state in which the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. , the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, when the current time reaches 10:20 during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect that can be performed is displayed (appears) again on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 1 set normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves toward the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character is moved while reducing the character size and finally moved to the state display area JH, a character image of "state 1" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 10:45. It has become. During the period until 10:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will continue to be the state of the setting suggestion effect.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 41(F), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is moved to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested.

After that, when the current time reaches 10:40 during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM2 of setting suggestion effect that can be performed is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 2" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is reflected as it is in the character image "state 2 setting is accurate", but the information "setting is accurate" is not reflected. By displaying "state 2" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 10:45. It has become. During the period until 10:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion effect is changed to "state 2" and stays in "state 2".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 41(I), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, when the current time reaches 10:45 during the fluctuation, the state display area JH displaying "state 2" disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 41(K). As a result, the state display of the setting suggestion effect ends. In other words, the state display from the current time of 10:00 during the change in FIG. 41(B) to the current time of 10:45 during the change in FIG. In a specific time zone of 45 minutes, which is a period, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be changed. When the state display of the setting suggestion effect is completed, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1".

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the change, when the current time reaches 11:00, until the current time reaches 11:45 (that is, over 45 minutes), as shown in FIG. The state display of the effect is started again, and the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect described above, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggesting effect is “state 1”, has a horizontally long rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the state display area JH is displayed (appears) again, and the character image "state 1 setting normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed toward the state display area JH. When it moves while reducing its size and finally moves to the state display area JH, a character image of "state 1" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 11:45. It has become. During the period until 11:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion effect, and the point that "state 1" stays is clearly indicated to the player.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 42(M), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Along with this, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and the state where the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, when the current time reaches 11:20 during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion rendering that can be performed is again displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 2" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is directly reflected in the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", whereas the information "state setting high accuracy" is not reflected. By displaying "state 2" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 11:45. It has become. During the period until 11:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion effect is changed to "state 2" and stays in "state 2".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 42(P), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "0", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is moved to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and there are only two reserved icons 9A that have not been digested.

After that, when the current time reaches 11:40 during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM3 of setting suggestion effect that can be performed is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 3 set high confidence".

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the state display area JH, the character image "state change" displayed in the state display area JH disappears from the state display area JH. , a character image of "state 3" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, in the character image "state 3 set high confidence", the information "state 3" is reflected as it is, but the information "set high confidence" is not reflected. By displaying "state 3" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 11:45. It has become. During the period until 11:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion presentation will transition to "state 3" and stay in "state 3".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 42(S), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, when the current time reaches 11:45 during the fluctuation, the state display area JH displaying "state 3" disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 42(U). As a result, the state display of the setting suggestion effect ends. In other words, the state display from the current time of 11:00 during the change in FIG. 41(L) to the current time of 11:45 during the change in FIG. 42(U) In a specific time zone of 45 minutes, which is a period, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be changed. When the state display of the setting suggestion effect is completed, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1".

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the change, when the current time reaches 12:00, until the current time reaches 12:45 (that is, over 45 minutes), as shown in FIG. The state display of the effect is started again, and the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect described above, which can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1", is in a horizontally long rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the state display area JH is displayed (appears) again, and the character image "state 1 setting normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed toward the state display area JH. When it moves while reducing its size and finally moves to the state display area JH, a character image of "state 1" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 12:45. It has become. During the period until 12:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion effect, and the point that "state 1" stays is clearly indicated to the player.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 92 of the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub control board 90 acquires the current date and time information from the RTC 95 of the effect control microcomputer 91, Based on the acquired current date and time information, the operation is performed from 10:00 until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is shut off. That is, the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect is started from 10:00 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off after 10:00. If there is, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change at "00 minutes", "20 minutes", and "40 minutes" among the hours and minutes, and a specific time zone of "00 minutes" to "45 minutes" (state display period) for 45 minutes, the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and during this state display period, the state of the setting suggestion effect The stay can be clearly indicated to the player.

In addition, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect, the state of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. 41(B), (E), (H), (L) and FIGS. The display image is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the determination made in the state transition process shown in FIG.

In addition, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect, for example, in FIG. The state display image JM1 of the setting suggestive effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "setting normal". At this time, the character image "state 1 setting normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally When moving to the state display area JH, the character image "state 1" was displayed in the state display area JH. However, when the character image "state 1 setting normal" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "state 2 setting high certainty" You can jump up to . By doing this, the contents of the character image "state 1 setting normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the character image displayed when the state display area JH is moved to are changed. Therefore, when the player's line of sight is moved to the state display area JH in addition to the character image "state 1 set normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, Since it is possible to direct even the character image, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the change in the state of the setting suggesting effect.

[State change effect Q for setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the upper side. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, the opaque state is changed to half. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the reservation icon 9A displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad. moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 43A, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the change, when the current time reaches 18:00, until the current time reaches 22:00 (that is, over four hours), as shown in FIG. A setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the effect state display is started and that the setting suggesting effect state is "state 1" has a horizontally long rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps a portion of the right side of the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped in the front-rear direction with a part of the left side of the variation area of the pattern 8R, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 22:00. It has become. During the period until 22:00, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion effect, and the point that "state 1" stays is clearly indicated to the player.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the state display region JH overlaps the downstream side of the variable region of the right performance symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the state display region JH is arranged on the frontmost side in the same manner as the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right production pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see. In addition, a dedicated state display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH is difficult to see through the background image for the status display area. The background image for the status display area may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image of "status 1". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH can be visually recognized through the background image for the state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. As a result, the state in which the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested.

After that, when the current time reaches 18:30 during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM3 of setting suggestion effect that can be performed is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the character, and finally moves to the state display area JH, a character image of "state 3" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, in the character image "state 3 set high confidence", the information "state 3" is reflected as it is, but the information "set high confidence" is not reflected. By displaying "state 3" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be displayed on the display screen 7a until 22:00. It has become. During the period until 22:00, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion presentation will transition to "state 3" and stay in "state 3".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 43(F), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, when the current time reaches 21:30 during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. A state display image JM2 of setting suggestion rendering that can be performed is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting is accurate" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image of "state change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the state display area background image described above is arranged in the area inside the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display area JH. Alternatively, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the state change will occur.

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the character, and finally moves to the state display area JH, a character image of "state 2" is displayed in the state display area JH. In other words, the information "state 2" is reflected as it is in the character image "state 2 setting is accurate", but the information "setting is accurate" is not reflected. By displaying "state 2" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 22:00. It has become. During the period until 22:00, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that the state of the setting-suggestion effect is changed to "state 2" and stays in "state 2".

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect Based on this, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variation icon 9C, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is moved to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and there are only two reserved icons 9A that have not been digested.

After that, during the change, when the current time reaches 21:59, as shown in FIG. be displayed (appear). This message image MS is an image announcing the end of the state display of the setting suggestive effect, includes a character image of "The state display will end soon", and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the message image MS is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS overlaps a part of the area on the right side of the variable area of the left production pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the message image MS is not obstructed by the left production pattern 8L and is not difficult to see. In addition, the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS straddles the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the left and right direction and overlaps the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the front and back direction, but the message image MS is in the middle effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS overlaps a part of the left side of the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, but the message image MS is not obstructed by the right effect symbol 8R. It is not obstructed by and does not become difficult to see.

A background image for the message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS, and a text image of "The status display will end soon" is arranged in front of the background image for the message image. ing. The background image for the message image is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "The status display will end soon." As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS is difficult to see through the background image for the message image. Note that the background image for the message image may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it is an image that can improve the visibility of the character image "Status display will end soon." In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS can be visually recognized through the background image for the message image. When the character image "Status display will end soon", which is the message image MS, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the voice "Status display will end soon", which is the content of the character image, is output from the speaker 67. It is designed to flow from As a result, it is possible to tell the player that the state display will end soon, also in the voice.

After the message image MS is displayed for a predetermined period (15 seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, when the current time reaches 22:00 during the fluctuation, the state display area JH displaying "state 2" disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 43(J). As a result, the state display of the setting suggestion effect ends. In other words, the state display from the current time of 18:00 during the change in FIG. 43(B) to the current time of 22:00 during the change in FIG. 43(J). In a specific time zone of 4 hours and 00 minutes, which is a period, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be changed. When the state display of the setting suggestion effect is completed, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1".

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 43(K), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 92 of the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub control board 90 acquires the current date and time information from the RTC 95 of the effect control microcomputer 91, Based on the acquired current date and time information, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be changed from 18:00 to 22:00. That is, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, in a specific time period of 4 hours and 00 minutes, which is the state display period from 18:00 to 22:00, The state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a, and the stay of the setting suggestion effect state can be clearly indicated to the player during this state display period. ing. In other words, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, when the specific start time of 18:00 is reached, the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, and when the specific end time of 22:00 is reached, the setting is started. The state display of the suggestive effect is terminated.

43(B), (E), and (H) are determined in the state transition process shown in FIG. Based on this, it is displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, for example, in FIG. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestive effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "setting is accurate". At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When moving toward the state display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moving to the state display area JH, the character image "state 2" was displayed in the state display area JH. However, when the character image "state 2 set high accuracy" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, "state 3 set high accuracy" You may jump up to "Shin". By doing so, the contents of the character image "state 2 setting accurate" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the character image displayed when moving to the state display area JH are changed. Therefore, the player's line of sight is not only displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also displayed when moving to the state display area JH. Since it is possible to direct the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of the state change effects P to Q of the setting suggestion effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect of FIGS. 41 and 42 and the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 20), a lottery (a "hit" or "losing" lottery) is performed with reference to the setting information and with a lottery probability corresponding to the setting information. A setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect determination process in FIG. 24) for making a suggestion based on setting information can be executed, and there are a plurality of setting suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting suggestion effect are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestive production states. Transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) for transitioning from the first state of the setting suggesting effect states to the second state in which the setting suggesting effect is more advantageous to the player than the first state is performed by a real-time clock. It can be executed based on time information output from a certain RTC 95 . By executing the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) based on the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock, for example, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. Transition from “state 1 setting normal” to “state 2 setting high accuracy”, and in state change effect Q of setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 43(E), transition from “state 1 setting normal” to “state 3 setting high confidence” are doing. According to this configuration, the RTC 95, which is the real-time clock, performs the transition processing from the first state of the setting suggesting effect states to the second state in which the setting suggesting effect is more advantageous to the player than the first state. Since it can be executed based on the time information output from the It is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of aiming to transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 41(B), (E), (H), (L) and FIGS. , based on the time information, 10:00 After that, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed when the specific times of "00 minutes", "20 minutes", and "40 minutes" are reached. ing. Also, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 43B to 43J, when a specific time of 18:00 is reached based on the time information, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is performed. It can be executed. According to this configuration, when a specific time is reached based on the time information output from the RTC 95, which is the real-time clock (in other words, in conjunction with the time information output from the RTC 95, which is the real-time clock), transition processing is performed. (State transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed, so control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion effect in conjunction with the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. After 45 minutes, which is a certain period of time, has passed, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state can be ended. After a lapse of 45 minutes, which is a certain period of time, the state display area JH displaying the state disappears from the display screen 7a in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 41(K). In addition, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 43(J), four hours (18:00 to 22:00), which is a fixed time after the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed based on the time information, is performed. When the period up to 00 minutes) has passed, the display of the current state of setting suggestion effect (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) can be ended. After four hours, which is a certain period of time, has elapsed, the state display area JH in which the state was displayed in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 43(J) disappears from the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, based on the time information output from the real-time clock RTC 95, when a certain period of time elapses after the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed (in other words, the real-time clock RTC 95 After a certain period of time has passed based on the time information output from the ), the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) can be ended. Therefore, when a certain period of time elapses based on the time information output from the RTC 95 which is a real-time clock, it can be used as a trigger for ending the change in the state of the setting suggesting effect in conjunction with this.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. At the first specific time of 10:40, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and then in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 41 (K), based on the time information, At a second specific time of 10:45, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) can be ended. In the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect, for example, in the time period from 10:00 to 10:45, the state of the current setting suggestion effect (current setting The suggestive effect state) is displayed in the state display area JH, so that it can be clearly indicated to the player. Also, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 43(B) to (J), transition processing to the first specific time from 18:00 to 22:00 based on the time information (see FIG. 23 state transition processing) is executed, and thereafter, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. It is possible to end the display of the state of the current setting suggestion effect transitioned by state transition processing (display of the current setting suggestion effect state). In the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, the state of the current setting suggestion effect (the current setting suggestion effect state) is displayed in the state display area JH, so that it can be clearly shown to the player. According to this configuration, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed at a first specific time based on time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock, and thereafter, based on the time information, At a second specific time, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) can be terminated. In other words, based on the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed at a first specific time, and at a second specific time Since the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) can be ended, the setting suggestion effect state is changed in conjunction with the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. It can be used as a trigger to end the change in the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification]
Modifications of the state change effects P to Q of the setting suggestion effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect of FIGS. 41 and 42 and the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. A transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) to a second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be an effect more advantageous to the player than the state is executed based on the time information output from the RTC 95 which is a real time clock. I was able to do it. However, in addition to the time information, calendar information may also be output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. In other words, the real-time clock RTC 95 may also have calendar information. In this way, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed when a predetermined number of elapsed introduction days have elapsed from the date of installation in the hall (game hall) based on the calendar information. Also, on a specific date, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed based on time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect of FIGS. 41 and 42 and the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. Transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) to the second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be an effect more advantageous to the player than the state is executed based on the time information output from the RTC 95 which is a real time clock. I was able to do it. However, in addition to the time information, the day of the week information may also be output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. In other words, the real-time clock RTC 95 may also have day-of-the-week information. In this way, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed when a specific day of the week is reached based on the day of the week information. As the specific day of the week, for example, on Friday, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed based on the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. Day (in other words, ◯◯ day)” is an event day, and an event can be held in the game machine 1 . As a result, the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed in the event, so that the player can easily determine the setting information, and the hall (game hall) It can also be timed for the side (store manager or administrator) to change the setting information (in other words, the setting information can be changed to match the event).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the state change effects P of setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 41(B), (E), (H), (L) and FIGS. In the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 43B, 43E, and 43H, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the state display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played from the speaker 67 as a voice. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1 normal setting". good too. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the state change (transition result) of the setting suggestion effect by voice.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can be (informed) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed except for the character image "state 2 setting accurate". The size of the characters is reduced toward the state display area JH where the character image "State 2: Set Accurate" is formed on the lower right corner side of the display screen 7a by gradually becoming transparent and disappearing from the screen 7a. When the state display area JH is reached, the character image "state 2" is displayed in the state display area JH. However, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect is displayed, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggesting effect is actually "state 3" but is intentionally "state 2". After that, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect gradually disappears from the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 2 setting high accuracy", and "state 2 setting high accuracy" disappears from the display screen 7a. When the character image moves toward the state display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, the state display area JH is displayed. , a character image of "state 3" may be displayed. In this way, the transition result of the state change may not be finalized until it is displayed in the state display area JH. Instead, it is possible to provide the player with an effect as if there was a transition of the state change after the character image was moved. It should be noted that this can also be applied to the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG.

[Modification 5]
41(K) and 42(U) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, and in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 43(J), the setting suggestion effect When the state display ends, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1". However, the state of the setting suggestion effect immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion effect ends may be stepped down by one instead of being set to "state 1". For example, when the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance is finished is "state 3", it may be set to "state 2" which is one step down from "state 3". Incidentally, when the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion effect ends, it becomes "state 1".

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 provided on the game board 2 is displayed in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 and the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. In the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the screen, the state of the setting suggestion effect (one of "state 1" to "state 4") was displayed. . However, instead of the image display device 7, the state of the setting suggesting effect may be displayed in the display area of another image display device provided on the game board 2, or the sub-display device provided on the door frame 53 may be displayed. The screen may display the state of the setting suggestion effect. The other image display device provided on the game board 2 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. For example, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decorative body 10 located at the lower right of the image display device 7, the image display device is provided in the center of this decorative member. The sub-display device is composed of a right sub-display device, a left sub-display device, and an upper sub-display device. The right sub-display device is provided on the right side of the front frame 53 , the left sub-display device is provided on the left side of the front frame 53 , and the upper sub-display device is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53 . The right sub-display device and the left sub-display device are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display device is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53 . The sub-display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The state of setting suggestion effect is displayed on one of the right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device, which constitute the sub-display device. As another image display device provided on the game board 2, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decoration body 10, a predetermined image is printed in advance instead of the image display device provided on the center decoration body 10. and a built-in backlight (plurality of light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. Thereby, a predetermined image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members on which a predetermined image is printed may be provided so that the predetermined image corresponding to the emitted color of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) may be displayed respectively. In this case, the predetermined images printed on the plurality of printing members are assumed to be different images. By doing this, the luminescent colors of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) can be, for example, red (first light emitting means), green (second light emitting means), blue (third light emitting means), white (fourth light emitting means). light emitting means), a predetermined image printed on the first printing member in red light when the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) emits red light (the first predetermined image "State 1 ”) is displayed, and a predetermined image printed on the second printing member in green light when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light (“state 2” which is a second predetermined image) is displayed. ) is displayed, and a predetermined image printed on the third printing member with blue light emission when the built-in backlight (third light emitting means) emits blue light (“state 3”, which is the third predetermined image) is displayed, and a predetermined image (“state 4”, which is a fourth predetermined image) printed on the fourth printing member in white light when the built-in backlight (fourth light emitting means) emits white light is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, by emitting light from the built-in backlight, it is possible to display the state of setting suggestion effect (one of "state 1" to "state 4") as a predetermined image. Of course, when the built-in backlight is turned off, the predetermined image is not displayed, so the state of the setting suggestion effect at this time (one of "state 1" to "state 4") is hidden.

[Modification 6]
41 and 42 and the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 43 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment may not include part of the effect described above. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 6-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
Time information output from a real-time clock for transition processing for transitioning from a first state of the setting suggesting performance states to a second state in which the setting suggesting performance can be a more advantageous performance for the player than the first state. is executable based on
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
executing the transition process when a specific time is reached based on the time information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or aspect 6-2,
the real-time clock further has calendar information;
When a predetermined number of elapsed days from the date of installation in the hall based on the calendar information is reached, the transition process is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-3,
The real-time clock further has day-of-the-week information,
executing the transition process when a specific day of the week is reached based on the day of the week information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 6-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-4,
When a certain period of time has passed since the transition process was executed based on the time information, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state is terminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-5,
executing the transition process at a first specific time based on the time information, and then ending the display of the current setting suggestion effect state at a second specific time based on the time information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects R to S of the setting suggestion effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. In FIGS. 44 to 46, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. 44 is a view for explaining the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 45 is a view for explaining the continuation of the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 44, and FIG. 46 is a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the state change production|presentation S of production|presentation.

As described above, the state change effect of this setting suggestion effect is determined by the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect ( The state of the setting suggestion effect associated with the reliability rate) is defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and step up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. By jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes, and the player aims at state 4, which is a new game feature. is given. Of course, in the state of setting suggestion effect, as described above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4, It may also step down or jump down (eg, juamp down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, first, the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect and the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect will be described in order. The state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect and the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect are performed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 63 .

The state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the player can operate the effect button 63 at the timing when the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is clearly indicated on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the state change effect S of the setting suggesting effect, the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is not indicated at all on the display screen 7a, and the player can press the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. It is different in that it is performed when the back button is successfully pressed. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect button 63 is lit in white, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, it flashes in white.

[State change effect R of setting suggestion effect]
The state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the upper side. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, the opaque state is changed to half. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the consumption is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the reservation icon 9A displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad. moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a ( disappears from the display screen 7a), and further, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the pending icons 9A, the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (display screen 7a disappear from). Along with this, a production button image BG corresponding to the production button 63 (which may be an image simulating the production button 63 or an image simulating an old model of the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 is displayed slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. ) is displayed above the effect button image BG and near the upper side of the display screen 7a, a message image MS1 saying "Press at the right time!" A timing bar TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed on the display screen 7a. Below the timing bar TB and closer to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the fastest position image T1 having a triangular shape indicating immediately after the start, which suggests the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63, and the middle having a triangular shape indicating the middle A position image T2 and a latest position image T3 having a triangular shape indicating immediately before the end are displayed in a row. The center of the effect button image BG and the center of the triangular intermediate position image T2 are arranged on a vertical line connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, since the effect button 63 is lit in white, the effect button image BG is also lit in white in conjunction with this. An effect in which the effect button image BG (including the message image MS1 when the message image MS1 is displayed on the display screen 7a) is called a effect button operation promotion effect (hereinafter the same). Also, when the character image "Press at the right timing!", which is the message image MS1, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the voice "Press at the right timing", which is the content of the character image, is played from the speaker 67. It has become. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect button 63 can be prompted also by the sound.

The character icon CI starts moving from the right start position toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (either a constant speed or repeated acceleration and deceleration) and reaches a point indicated by the fastest position image T1. Although the player presses the effect button 63 aiming at the right timing, this pressing operation is slightly delayed and the timing is off. As a result, as shown in FIG. A message image MS2 reading "Failed" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, because the pressing operation of the effect button 63 was unsuccessful, the light flashes in blue as a failure light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it blinks in blue. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white.

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the fastest position image T1, continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (it may be a constant speed, or may be accelerated and decelerated repeatedly), and moves to the intermediate position. The player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing of reaching the point indicated by the position image T2. A message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a in the upper left of the image BG. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes green. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white.

Further, when the message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the upper left of the effect button image BG on the display screen 7a, "state 1" is displayed on the upper right of the effect button image BG as a setting suggestion effect ” is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM1 of this setting suggesting effect displays the text information "state 1" in the upper part and the text image "setting normal" in the lower part. are placed.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1" is placed in front of the state 1 display background image. and a character image of "setting normal" are arranged. The background image for status 1 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character images "status 1" and "setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character images of "state 1" and "setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2 and continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may be repeatedly accelerated and decelerated). As shown in 44(E), after a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment), so that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 1". Staying in "state 1" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2, continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (the speed may be constant, or acceleration and deceleration may be repeated), The player presses the effect button 63 aiming at the timing of reaching the point indicated by the late position image T3. A message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a in the upper left of the button image BG. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes green. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white.

Furthermore, in the upper right of the effect button image BG, a setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is “state 2” is horizontally long rectangular. is displayed (appears) with The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect is divided into upper and lower stages, and the character information "state 2" is displayed in the upper part, and the character image "setting is accurate" is displayed in the lower part. are placed in The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the slowest position image T3 and continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may be repeatedly accelerated and decelerated). After a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a. and disappear. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), so that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 2". Staying in "state 2" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 2" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect disappears from the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (during variable display), the middle effect symbol 8C during the variable effect (during variable display), and the variable effect (during variable display) middle) is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed again.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 44(G), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. As a result, the state in which the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 44(H), the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. , and there are only two reserved icons 9A that have not been digested.

After that, during the variation, as shown in FIG. 44(I), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variation The icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a). Along with this, a production button image BG corresponding to the production button 63 (which may be an image simulating the production button 63 or an image simulating an old model of the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 is displayed slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. ) is displayed again, and the message image MS1 above the effect button image BG and near the upper side of the display screen 7a is displayed again, and below the effect button image BG, A coin-shaped character icon CI in which a character is formed moves from a right start position to a left end position, and a horizontally long rectangular timing bar TB indicating the passage of time is displayed again on the display screen 7a. Here, below the timing bar TB and near the lower side of the display screen 7a, a latest position image T3 having a triangular shape indicating just before the end is displayed, suggesting the pressing operation timing of the effect button 63. FIG. In addition, since the effect button 63 is lit in white, the effect button image BG is also lit in white in conjunction with this. Also, when the message image MS1, that is, the character image "Press at the right timing!" It has become. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect button 63 can be prompted also by the sound.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44(J), the character icon CI moves from the right start position toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may be repeatedly accelerated and decelerated). Start.

After that, the player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the character icon CI reaches the point indicated by the latest position image T3. As shown, a message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a in the upper left of the effect button image BG. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes green. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white.

Furthermore, in the upper right of the effect button image BG, a setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is “state 3” is horizontally long rectangular. is displayed (appears) with The state display image JM3 of this setting suggesting effect is divided into upper and lower stages to display the character information "state 3" in the upper part and the character image "setting information" in the lower part. are placed in The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the slowest position image T3 and continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may be repeatedly accelerated and decelerated). After a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a. and disappear. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), so that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 3". Staying in "state 3" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 3" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect.

In FIG. 44(D), a setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 1" is displayed. In FIG. 44(F), a state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", is displayed. At (K), a setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 3" is displayed. The player is suggested (reported) to the state suggestion (report) of the setting suggestion performance by stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down in the order of 'state 2'→'state 3'. As a result, since the state display image JM3 of the last displayed setting suggestion effect indicates (informs) the player that it is in "state 3" at the present time, the change after the change ends (that is, the state display image JM3) In the change from the next fluctuation), the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect. Become.

Here, since it is determined that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 2"→"state 3", the setting suggestions shown in FIG. In the effect pattern table, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5, 6) among setting effect pattern 8 to setting effect pattern 13 is confirmed as the setting suggesting effect pattern. For this reason, in the present embodiment, setting information: setting 4, 5, and 6 are narrowed down. The state of the presentation is initialized to "state 1".

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect disappears from the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (during variable display), the middle effect symbol 8C during the variable effect (during variable display), the variable effect (during variable display) middle) is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed again.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 44(L), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is stopped and displayed a plurality of times. By confirming the loss, it does not become a hit and the loss continues.

After that, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (plays a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves to the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 45(M), the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the variation, as shown in FIG. 45(N), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variation The icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a). Along with this, a production button image BG corresponding to the production button 63 (which may be an image simulating the production button 63 or an image simulating an old model of the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 is displayed slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. ) is displayed above the effect button image BG and near the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MS1 saying "Press at the right time!" A coin-shaped character icon CI with a . Here, below the timing bar TB and closer to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the fastest position image T1 having a triangular shape indicating immediately after the start, which suggests the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63, and a triangular shape indicating the middle are displayed in a row. The center of the effect button image BG and the center of the triangular intermediate position image T2 are arranged on a vertical line connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, since the effect button 63 is lit in white, the effect button image BG is also lit in white in conjunction with this. Also, when the character image "Press at the right timing!", which is the message image MS1, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the voice "Press at the right timing", which is the content of the character image, is played from the speaker 67. It has become. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect button 63 can be prompted also by the sound.

The character icon CI starts moving from the right start position toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (either a constant speed or repeated acceleration and deceleration) and reaches a point indicated by the fastest position image T1. The player presses the effect button 63 aiming at the right timing, and when the timing of this pressing operation matches, as shown in FIG. An image MS3 is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes green. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white.

Here, unlike FIGS. 44(D), (F), and (K), when the message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the upper left of the effect button image BG on the display screen 7a, the effect button At the upper right of the image BG, the setting suggestion effect state display image capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed (does not appear) on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 44(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", is displayed. Next, in FIG. 44(F), a state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2". In FIG. 44(K), a state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3", is displayed. 1"→"state 2"→"state 3", stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down to suggest (notify) the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance to the player. This is because it is determined that the status is "state 3" or higher. As a result, in FIG. 45(O), the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In other words, the candidates for the setting information are narrowed down by confirming that the status is "state 3" or higher. That is, when the setting information candidates have already been narrowed down in FIG. They are not displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, since it is determined that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 2"→"state 3", the setting suggestions shown in FIG. In the effect pattern table, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5, 6) among setting effect pattern 8 to setting effect pattern 13 is confirmed as the setting suggesting effect pattern. By this determination, as described above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5 , 6), until the number of variable performances (variable displays) of performance symbols (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times (15 times in this embodiment), the setting suggesting performance is performed a predetermined number of times. , the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Setting suggestion production will be performed.

In this embodiment, 15 times is preset as the predetermined number of times. When playing a game by borrowing one game ball for 4 yen, 250 game balls can be shot to the game area 3 for 1000 yen. About 100 game balls can be launched toward the game area 3 per minute. Assuming that about 15 balls enter the first start hole 20 for 1000 yen, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: Based on the settings 4, 5, 6), the setting suggestion effect is performed. As a result, even if the state display of the setting suggesting effect is finished, the player can continue to use the setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5, 6) in which setting information candidates are narrowed down by 1000 yen. It is possible to confirm the reliability of the performed setting suggestion performance, and even if the player is forced to leave the game machine 1 and end the game for some reason, the game can be continued for 1000 yen. After that, the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Even if the setting suggesting effect is performed and other players start playing, it is difficult to determine the setting information of the gaming machine 1 at the start, although the candidates for the setting information are actually narrowed down. can be

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the fastest position image T1, and as shown in FIG. ), and as shown in FIG. 45(Q), the player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing of reaching the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2. , a message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a on the upper left of the effect button image BG. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes green. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white.

44(D), (F), and (K), when the message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the upper left of the effect button image BG on the display screen 7a, the effect button At the upper right of the image BG, the setting suggestion effect state display image capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed (does not appear) on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 44(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 1", is displayed. Next, in FIG. 44(F), a state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2". In FIG. 44(K), a state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3", is displayed. 1"→"state 2"→"state 3", stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down to suggest (notify) the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance to the player. This is because it is determined that the status is "state 3" or higher. As a result, in FIG. 45(O), the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In other words, the candidates for the setting information are narrowed down by confirming that the status is "state 3" or higher. In other words, in FIG. 44(K), the state display of the setting suggestion effect has ended when the setting information candidates have already been narrowed down. They are not displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is determined that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 2"→"state 3". In the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 2, it is confirmed that the setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5, 6) is selected from the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13 as the setting suggestion effect pattern. there is By this determination, as described above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5 , 6), until the number of variable performances (variable displays) of performance symbols (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times, the setting suggesting performance is performed a predetermined number of times (15 times in this embodiment). , the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Setting suggestion production will be performed.

The character icon CI passes through the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2 and continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may be repeatedly accelerated and decelerated). As indicated by 45(R), the point indicated by the latest position image T3 is reached. After that, the left effect symbol 8L during the variable effect (during variable display), the middle effect symbol 8C during the variable effect (during variable display), and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Further, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 45(S), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. As a result, the state in which the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In the state change effect R of the setting suggesting effect, the coin-shaped character icon CI in which the character is shaped moves from the right start position to the left end position, and is positioned below the timing bar TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the passage of time. Any one of the fastest position image T1, the intermediate position image T2, and the slowest position image T3, which suggests the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63, any one position image, any two position images, or all positions When the image is displayed, the character icon CI starts to move from the right start position toward the left end position at a predetermined speed, and the player presses the effect button 63 at the timing indicated on the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed and the timing of this pressing operation matches, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a by pressing the effect button 63 at a specific timing (at the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63). It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is to be stayed.

In addition, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect, when the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, it is suggested to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" in FIG. A setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 that can be (notified) is displayed, and then, in FIG. ) is displayed, and then, in FIG. 44(K), the player is suggested (notified) that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3". A state display image JM3 of a setting suggestive effect that can be set is displayed, and the setting is made by stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down in the order of “state 1” → “state 2” → “state 3”. By suggesting (notifying) the state suggestion (notification) of the suggestive effect to the player, when it is confirmed that the "state 3" or higher is selected and the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the setting suggestion is triggered. 45(O) and (Q), the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed at a specific timing (by the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 63), the setting information candidates are narrowed down. , the state display of the setting suggestion effect is terminated.

In the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 44(C), (D), (F), (K) and FIGS. It is hidden or displayed based on what is determined in the state transition processing shown in FIG. 23 .

[State change effect S of setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the upper side. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, the opaque state is changed to half. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the reservation icon 9A displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad. moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. becomes.

After that, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the medium effect The pattern 8C is in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display), and the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are aligned with the same number pattern (here, the number "7") to form a reach.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the third When the 1st reservation display position 9Ad to the 4th reservation display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), a battle effect is started as shown in FIG. 46(C).

When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the lower left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and the ally character appears at the center of the display screen 7a. CRA and enemy character CRB fight. Since the battle effect can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the battle effect is not started, the player has a high interest in the battle effect. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation, it is a win, and then a win game is started in which a profit is given to the player. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, the result is lost.

When this battle effect is started and there is no image or sound prompting the pressing operation of the effect button 63 during the battle effect, the player presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. When the setting suggestion effect state display is started by "success", the setting suggestion effect state display image is displayed, and when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the setting suggestion effect state display ends and the setting suggestion effect status display image disappears.

A battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB appears from the lower left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and they both move toward the center of the display screen 7a. 46 (D ), a message image MS3 of "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. After that, the production button 63 is again illuminated in white.

Further, when the message image MS3 of "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, "state 1" is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a as the state of setting suggestion effect. A setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the fact is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM1 of this setting suggesting effect displays the text information "state 1" in the upper part and the text image "setting normal" in the lower part. are placed.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1" is placed in front of the state 1 display background image. and a character image of "setting normal" are arranged. The background image for status 1 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character images "status 1" and "setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character images of "state 1" and "setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(E), the friend character CRA moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side of the display screen 7a. After a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect gradually appears from the display screen 7a. It becomes transparent and disappears. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment), so that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 1". Staying in "state 1" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, the ally character CRA moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB moves from the lower right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. 46 (F ), a message image MS3 of "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as a successful light emission mode. After that, the production button 63 is again illuminated in white.

Further, when the message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, "state 3" is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a as the state of setting suggestion effect. A setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 capable of suggesting (informing) the player that there is a certain state is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggesting effect is divided into upper and lower stages, and the character information of "state 3" is displayed in the upper part, and the character image of "setting is high" is displayed in the lower part. are placed in The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46G, the friend character CRA moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Then, after a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a. and disappear. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), so that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 3". Staying in "state 3" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 3" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect.

In FIG. 46(D), a state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". In FIG. 46(F), a state display image JM3 of setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that it is "state 3" as the state of the setting suggestion effect, is displayed. →“state 3”, the player is suggested (notified) of the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance by jumping up without stepping down or jumping down. As a result, since the state display image JM3 of the last displayed setting suggestion effect indicates (informs) the player that it is in "state 3" at the present time, the change after the change ends (that is, the state display image JM3) In the change from the next fluctuation), the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect. Become.

Here, since it is confirmed that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by transitioning in the order of "state 1"→"state 3", in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), As the setting suggestion effect pattern, the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6) among the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13 is confirmed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the setting information is narrowed down to settings 5 and 6. With this as a trigger, the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the setting suggestion effect is not displayed. Initialize the state to "state 1".

After that, the friend character CRA moves from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB moves from the lower left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. The player pressed the effect button 63 aiming at the timing when the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB held their swords again in the center. As shown in 46(H), a message image MS2 of "failure" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as the light emission mode. However, since the pressing operation of the effect button 63 was unsuccessful, the light flashes in blue as the failure light emission mode. After that, the production button 63 is again illuminated in white.

Here, when the message image MS2 of "failure" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion effect is indicated to the player on the upper right side of the display screen 7a ( The state display image of the setting suggestion effect that can be notified) is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(I), the friend character CRA moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Moving.

After that, the friend character CRA moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB moves from the lower right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. 46 (J ), a message image MS3 of "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Note that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the light flashes in white as the light emission mode, but here, since the press operation of the effect button 63 was successful, the light flashes in green as the success light emission mode. After that, the production button 63 is again illuminated in white.

Here, unlike FIGS. 46(D) and (F), when the message image MS3 of "success" is displayed on the upper left of the effect button image BG on the display screen 7a, the message image MS3 on the upper right of the display screen 7a is displayed accordingly. In addition, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect which can suggest (notify) the state of the setting suggestion effect to the player is not displayed (does not appear) on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 46(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, which can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", is displayed. Next, in FIG. 46(F), a state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed, which can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3". By jumping up without stepping down or jumping down in the order of "state 1" → "state 3" and suggesting (notifying) the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion effect to the player, "state 3" This is because it has been established that it is more than As a result, in FIG. 46(J), the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In other words, the candidates for the setting information are narrowed down by confirming that the status is "state 3" or higher. That is, when the setting information candidates have already been narrowed down in FIG. They are not displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, since it is confirmed that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by transitioning in the order of "state 1"→"state 3", in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), As the setting suggestion effect pattern, the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6) among the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13 is confirmed. By this confirmation, as described above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6 ), until the number of variable effects (variable display) of the effect pattern (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (15 times in the present embodiment), the setting suggestion effect is performed, and the predetermined number of times is reached. Then, the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. A suggestive performance will be performed.

In this embodiment, 15 times is preset as the predetermined number of times. When playing a game by borrowing one game ball for 4 yen, 250 game balls can be shot to the game area 3 for 1000 yen. About 100 game balls can be launched toward the game area 3 per minute. Assuming that about 15 balls enter the first start hole 20 for 1000 yen, setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: Based on the settings 5 and 6), the setting suggestion effect is performed. As a result, even if the state display of the setting suggesting effect is finished, the player can perform based on the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6) in which setting information candidates are narrowed down by 1000 yen. In addition, even if the player is forced to leave the gaming machine 1 and ends the game for some reason, the player can continue the game for 1,000 yen. The state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and the setting suggestion is made based on any one of the setting effect pattern 1 to the setting effect pattern 7 in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B). Even if the performance is performed and other players start the game, it is difficult to determine the setting information of the game machine 1 at the start time, although the candidates for the setting information are actually narrowed down. be able to.

After that, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production in the battle production, the left production pattern 8L during the temporary stop display, the middle production pattern 8C during the variable production (during the variable display), and the temporary stop display. The right effect pattern 8R is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are again displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 46(K), the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8", and the patterns of the same number (here, the number "7") are not aligned, and then , the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stop-displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

As described above, in FIG. 46(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed, which can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Then, in FIG. 46(F), a setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 3" is displayed. The state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion effect is suggested (notified) to the player by jumping up from "state 1" to "state 3". As a result, since the state display image JM3 of the last displayed setting suggestion effect indicates (informs) the player that it is in "state 3" at the present time, the change after the change ends (that is, the state display image JM3) In the change from the next fluctuation), the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect. Become. Here, as described above, it is determined that the status is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 3", so the setting suggestions shown in FIG. In the effect pattern table, setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6) among setting effect pattern 8 to setting effect pattern 13 is confirmed as the setting suggesting effect pattern. By this determination, as described above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1". ), until the number of times (the number of lotteries) of variable effects (variable displays) of the effect symbols reaches a predetermined number (15 times in this embodiment), setting suggestion effects are performed, and the predetermined number of times is reached. Then, the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. A suggestive performance will be performed.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. As a result, there is no stocked pending icon 9A that has not been digested.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is awarded a profit is started.

In the state change effect S of the setting suggesting effect, when the player presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing in a state where the battle effect is started and there is no image or sound prompting the pressing operation of the effect button 63 during the battle effect. , the so-called "successful pressing operation of the back button", that is, the player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB are holding their swords in the center of the display screen 7a, and this pressing operation is performed. , the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change effect S of the setting suggesting effect, the effect button 63 is pressed at a specific timing (at the center of the display screen 7a, aiming at the timing when the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords). By pressing the effect button 63, a state display image of the setting suggesting effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the player can be clearly shown to stay in the state of the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect, when the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, in FIG. A setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 that can be (notified) is displayed, and then, in FIG. ) is displayed, and the setting suggestion effect state indication image JM3 is displayed, and the state suggestion of the setting suggestion effect ( By suggesting (announcing) to the player, when it is confirmed that the "state 3" or higher is selected and the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the state display of the setting suggesting effect is terminated with this as a trigger. However, in FIG. 46(J), the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change effect S of the setting suggesting effect, the effect button 63 is pressed at a specific timing (at the center of the display screen 7a, aiming at the timing when the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords). When the setting information candidates are narrowed down by pressing the effect button 63, the state display of the setting suggestion effect is ended.

46(D), (F), and (H) are determined in the state transition process shown in FIG. It may or may not be displayed based on

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the state change effects R to S of the setting suggesting effects will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect of FIGS. 44 and 45 and the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 20), a lottery (a "hit" or "losing" lottery) is performed with reference to the setting information and with a lottery probability corresponding to the setting information. A setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect determination process in FIG. 24) for making a suggestion based on setting information can be executed, and there are a plurality of setting suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting suggestion effect are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestive production states. It has an effect button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player. When the effect button 63 (operating means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing, the setting suggestion effect can be an effect more advantageous to the player than the first state from the first state of the setting suggestion effect states. Transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) for transitioning to the second state can be executed. Specific timings include, for example, the fastest position image T1 in FIG. 44(C), the intermediate position image T2 in FIG. 44(D), the slowest position image T3 in FIGS. 44(F) and (K), and FIG. 46(D). , (F), and (H) at the center of the display screen 7a, there is a timing at which the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords. ), the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is executed, for example, in FIG. ), there is a transition from “state 2 setting high accuracy” to “state 3 setting high reliability”, and in FIG. 46(F), there is a transition from “state 1 setting normal” to “state 3 setting high reliability”. According to this configuration, the effect button 63 (operating means) can be executed when a pressing operation (operation) is performed at a specific timing. It is possible to provide the player with a new game feature in which the player plays a game and aims to transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. ) starts, there are three specific timings of the fastest position image T1, the intermediate position image T2, and the slowest position image T3 in the variation, and such specific timings are the results of the lottery. , There are multiple times before the "loss" is reported. According to this configuration, when the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. It is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect by the input operation of pressing the effect button 63 (operation means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the state change effects R of the setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. An image BG (operation means image) is displayed, and an effect button operation promotion effect (operation effect) using the effect button 63 (operation means) can be executed. In the effect button operation promotion effect (operation effect) shown in FIGS. 44(B) to (F), the effect button 63 (operation means) is pressed at specific timings of the fastest position image T1, intermediate position image T2, and slowest position image T3. When operated (operated), the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed, and the production button 63 ( When the operating means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing of the latest position image T3, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, the effect button image BG (operation means image) corresponding to the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed, and the effect button operation promotion effect (operation effect) using the effect button 63 (operation means) is executed. Thus, the player can be prompted to press (operate) the effect button 63 (operating means).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. A battle effect (specific effect) can be executed using the effect button 63 (operation means) without being displayed. 46(D), (F), and (H), the performance button 63 (operation means) is pressed at the center of the display screen 7a in the battle performance (specific performance), and the timing at which the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords. When a pressing operation (operation) is performed at a specific timing, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the effect button image BG (operation means image) corresponding to the effect button 63 (operation means) is not displayed and the battle effect (specific effect) using the effect button 63 (operation means) is executed, When the player presses (operates) the production button 63 (operation means) at the timing when the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords at the center of the display screen 7a, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect by so-called "success in pressing the back button" during the battle effect (specific effect).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. It is possible to end the display of the state of production (the display of the state of production suggesting the current setting). In FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), in FIG. 44(K), "state 1"→"state 2"→"state 3" are stepped up one by one without stepping down or jumping down. Then, the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion effect is suggested (notified) to the player, and it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 2"→"state 3". In the setting suggestion effect pattern table, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5, 6) among setting effect pattern 8 to setting effect pattern 13 is confirmed as the setting suggesting effect pattern. In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 46(J), the display of one state transitioned by the transition processing (the state transition process shown in FIG. 23) is performed by narrowing down the setting information candidates by the setting suggestion effect. It is designed to be able to end with this as an opportunity. In FIG. 46(J), already in FIG. 46(F), the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion effect is played by jumping up without stepping down or jumping down in the order of "state 1"→"state 3". By suggesting (informing) the person, it is determined that it is "state 3" or higher. In the present embodiment, it is confirmed that the state is higher than or equal to "state 3" by making transitions in the order of "state 1"→"state 3". , it is confirmed that the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6) is selected from the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13 as the setting suggesting effect pattern. According to this configuration, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) is ended and set when the setting information candidates are narrowed down by the setting suggestion effect that has been transitioned so far. It can be the end of the change in the state of the suggestive effect.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the state change effects R to S of the setting suggesting effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), in FIG. , the set effect pattern 8 to Of the set effect patterns 13, the set effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) has been determined. In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestive effect shown in FIG. 46(J), it has already been changed in the order of "state 1"→"state 3" in FIG. is confirmed, in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6). However, instead of this, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) ends at the timing when the possibility of the setting information becoming the first specific setting information disappears due to the setting suggestion effect. You may make it For example, in the setting suggestive effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25B, when setting effect pattern 7 to setting effect pattern 9 out of setting effect pattern 8 to setting effect pattern 13 are executed as setting suggestive effect patterns, Setting information: Setting 1 will be denied. In this way, by setting the setting information: setting 1 as the first specific setting information, the current setting suggestion is triggered by the timing when the possibility of the setting information becoming the first specific setting information disappears due to the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to end the display of the state of production (the display of the current setting suggestion production state).

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), in FIG. , the set effect pattern 8 to Of the set effect patterns 13, the set effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) has been determined. In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestive effect shown in FIG. 46(J), it has already been changed in the order of "state 1"→"state 3" in FIG. is confirmed, in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6). However, instead of this, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) ends at the timing when the setting information is determined to be the second specific setting information by the setting suggestion effect. You may make it For example, in the setting suggestive effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), when setting effect patterns 10 and 13 out of setting effect patterns 8 to 13 are executed as setting suggestive effect patterns, setting information: When setting 6 is reached and setting effect patterns 11 and 13 are executed, the setting information becomes setting 5. In this way, setting information: setting 6 or setting information: setting 5 is single as the second specific setting information, so that the setting information is the second specific setting information by the setting suggestion effect. is determined, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) can be terminated.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, state change effects R of setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 44(D), (F), and (K), and state change effects S of setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. , the state display image of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the state display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played from the speaker 67 as a voice. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1 normal setting". good too. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the state change (transition result) of the setting suggestion effect by voice.

[Modification 4]
44(C), (D), (F), (K) and FIGS. 45(O), (Q), the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. ), (F), (H), and (J), the message image MS2 of "failure" or the message image MS3 of "success" was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the voices "failure" and "success", which are the contents of the message images MS2 and MS3, may be played from the speaker 67. FIG. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the pressing operation of the effect button 63 also by voice.

[Modification 5]
44 and 45 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, and in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 46, setting information candidates are narrowed down by the setting suggestion effect. Triggered by this, the state of the setting suggestion effect was initialized to "state 1". However, the state of the setting suggestion effect immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion effect ends may be stepped down by one instead of being set to "state 1". For example, when the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance is finished is "state 3", it may be set to "state 2" which is one step down from "state 3".

[Modification 6]
44 and 45 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when setting information candidates are narrowed down, a setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: Based on the settings 4, 5, 6), until the number of variable effects (variable display) of the effect pattern (the number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect is performed, and a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, , 15 times), the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Setting suggestion production was performed based on either. In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 46, when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the effect symbol Until the number of variable effects (variable displays) of (lottery number of times) reaches a predetermined number (15 times in this embodiment), the setting suggestion effect is performed, and when the predetermined number is reached, the setting suggestion effect state is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. . However, when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1" instead of the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6) in which the setting information candidates are narrowed down. In the corresponding setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25B, the setting suggestion effect may be performed based on any one of the setting effect pattern 1 to the setting effect pattern 7. FIG. The player knows that the candidates for the setting information have already been narrowed down, and when the candidates for the setting information are narrowed down, he is forced to leave the gaming machine 1 for some reason and end the game. Even if there is a case, the state of the setting suggestion performance is initialized and the setting suggestion performance is performed by the setting performance pattern corresponding to "state 1", so that other players start the game. Even if this happens, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the setting information of the gaming machine 1 at the start, although the candidates for the setting information are actually narrowed down.

[Modification 7]
44 and 45 and the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 46 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment may not include part of the effect described above. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 7-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
Having an operation means that can be operated by a player,
When the operating means is operated at a specific timing, a transition is made from a first state of the setting suggesting performance states to a second state in which the setting suggesting performance is more advantageous to the player than the first state. It is possible to execute transition processing to
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
The specific timing is plural until the result of the lottery is notified,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 7-1 or aspect 7-2,
an operation means image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, and an operation effect using the operation means can be executed;
executing the transition process when the operation means is operated at the specific timing in the operation presentation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 7-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect 7-1 or aspect 7-2,
an operation means image corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, and a specific effect using the operation means can be executed;
When the operation means is operated at the specific timing in the specific effect, the transition process is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-4,
The display of the current setting suggestion effect state is terminated when the setting information candidates are narrowed down by the setting suggestion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-5,
Ending the display of the current setting suggestion effect state at the timing when the possibility of the setting information becoming the first specific setting information disappears due to the setting suggestion effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 7-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-5,
Ending the display of the current setting suggestion effect state at the timing when the setting information is determined to be the second specific setting information by the setting suggestion effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects T to V of the setting suggestion effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. In FIGS. 47 to 49, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. 49 is a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining V;

As described above, the state change effect of this setting suggestion effect is determined by the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect ( The state of the setting suggestion effect associated with the reliability rate) is defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and step up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. By jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes, and the player aims at state 4, which is a new game feature. is given. Of course, in the state of setting suggestion effect, as described above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4, It may also step down or jump down (eg, juamp down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, the state change effect T of the setting suggesting effect, the state change effect U of the setting suggesting effect, and the state change effect V of the setting suggesting effect will be described in order.

[State change effect T of setting suggestion effect]
The state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) upward once. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), and the speed is gradually increased from a low speed downward to a half from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the effect pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The gaming machine 1 is in a state of waiting for a customer (waiting for a player), and a standby screen (a demo screen for waiting for customers, including a screen in which the production pattern is stopped) is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the player sits on the front surface of the gaming machine 1 and starts the game, the player enters the game ball into the first starting port 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), and the game ball is played. 47 (A ), the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(B), the game is started from the standby screen, and when 20 minutes of the game time have passed, the state of the setting suggestion effect is started. A state display image JM1 of a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the state is "state 1" is displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a with a horizontally long rectangular shape ( Appear). The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps a portion of the right side of the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped with the part of the left side of the variable area of the pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. By displaying the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1", so that the stay in the "state 1" is played. It is possible to clearly indicate to the person.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, the state in which the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the game does not hit and loses continuously. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(D), the game is started from the standby screen, and when the game time elapses for 40 minutes, the state of setting suggestion effect is set to "state 1". A state display image JM1 of a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting (informing) the player of a certain state is displayed (appears) again on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape.

When the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a and disappears again. By displaying the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1", so that the stay in the "state 1" is played. It is possible to clearly indicate to the person.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(E), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the game does not hit and loses continuously. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. Then, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(F), the game is started from the standby screen, and when the game time has passed for 60 minutes, this triggers the state of the setting suggestion effect to be "state 2". A setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the fact is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. By displaying the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 2", so that the stay in the "state 2" is played. It is possible to clearly indicate to the person.

In the state where this "state 2" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(G), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the game does not hit and loses continuously. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(H), the game is started from the standby screen, and when the game time has passed for 80 minutes, this triggers the state of the setting suggestion effect to be "state 2". The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the fact that there is a situation is again displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a having a horizontally long rectangular shape.

When the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a and disappears again. By displaying the state display image JM2 of the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 2", so that the stay in the "state 2" is played. It is possible to clearly indicate to the person.

In the state where this "state 2" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 47(I), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is moved to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and there is no success and a series of losses, and then the left effect pattern 8L is the number "7". , the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". After that, as shown in FIG. 47(J), a standby screen appears. The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for a customer, and includes a screen in which the production pattern is stopped and displayed. By changing to this standby screen, although the state of the setting suggestion effect has risen from "state 1" to "state 2", it is reset and returns to "state 1".

When the gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting (player waiting) state and a waiting screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player sits in front of the gaming machine 1 and starts a game. performs a game in which a game ball is entered into the first starting port 20 (performs a so-called left-handed game), the game ball happens to enter the first starting port 20 in succession, and the first reservation display position When the pending icon 9A displayed in 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, the game is started from the standby screen as shown in FIG. A state display image JM1 of a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the state is "state 1" is displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a with a horizontally long rectangular shape ( Appear).

When the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. By displaying the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1", so that the stay in the "state 1" is played. It is possible to clearly indicate to the person.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In the state change effect T of the setting suggesting effect, the gaming machine 1 is in the state of waiting for customers (waiting for players), and the standby screen (demonstration screen for customer waiting) is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. screen) is displayed, the player sits in front of the gaming machine 1 to start the game, and the player enters the game ball into the first start hole 20 ( When a so-called left-handed game is played), the game time is measured, and after 20 minutes, 40 minutes, 60 minutes, and 80 minutes from the standby screen, that is, when the game is started, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed every 20 minutes. is displayed on the display screen 7a.

47(B), (D), (F), (H), and (L) in the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what is determined in the transition process.

In addition, in the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect, the game time is measured and 20 minutes, 40 minutes, 60 minutes, and 80 minutes from the standby screen, that is, when the game is started, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed every 20 minutes. The display image was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of playing time, out is measured, which is the total number of the number of game balls that flowed down to the game area and entered various winning holes and the number of game balls that were collected from the out hole. Then, based on the out, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the display screen 7a. For example, every time the out reaches the values "1995", "3995", and "5995", the state display image of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Out is a value from 0 to 5,999, and is reset to 0 when the value exceeds 5,999.

[State change effect U of setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the upper side. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, the opaque state is changed to half. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

A player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting port 20 (playing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), two game balls happen to enter the first starting port 20 in succession, and a first reservation is performed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, in the change, as shown in FIG. 48(B), a state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect overlaps a portion of the right side of the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is the left effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not hindered by the pattern 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape straddles the variation area of the middle effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the variable area in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the right effect. Although the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is overlapped with the part of the left side of the variable area of the pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, it is not obstructed by the right effect pattern 8R and does not become difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image dedicated to state 1 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect. A character image of "Normal" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. The background image for displaying state 1 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "state 1 setting normal". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" and stay in "state 1". there is

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

Although the state display region JH overlaps the downstream side of the variable region of the right performance symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the state display region JH is arranged on the frontmost side in the same manner as the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right production pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. In addition, a dedicated state display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the state display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "status 1". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH is difficult to see through the background image for the status display area. The background image for the status display area may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image of "status 1". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display area JH can be visually recognized through the background image for the state display area.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 48(C), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the game does not hit and loses continuously. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After that, in the change, as shown in FIG. 48(D), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2". has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state display area JH continues to display "state 1" on the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggesting effect includes a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 2 display dedicated to state 2 (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 2, a character image of "state 2 setting accurate" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "state 2 set high accuracy".

When the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 2 setting high certainty". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a character image of "state 2, setting is accurate" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When moving toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moving to the state display area JH, the character image "state 2" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and "" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. Standby for activation" are displayed separately in the upper and lower stages. In other words, the information "State 2" is reflected as it is in the text image "State 2 Setting High Accuracy", while the information "Setting High Accuracy" is switched to the information "Waiting for activation". there is

Here, at the present time, the state of the setting suggestion effect does not change to "state 2" and remains "state 1", but the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". 1” can be clearly indicated to the player, and by displaying a character image of “state 2” and “waiting for activation” in the state display area JH, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed to “state 2”. The player can be informed that he has acquired the right to change.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 48(E), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, the state display area JH continues to display the character images "state 2" and "waiting for activation" on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. At this time, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character image "state 2" and "waiting for activation" is switched to the character image "state 1".

After that, during the change, as shown in FIG. 48(G), the message image MS1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character image "state 1" is switched to the character image "state 2" and "waiting for activation".

Since the player has already acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggesting performance from "state 1" to "state 2", this message image MS1 conveys the method of changing the state of the setting suggesting performance and activating it. It is an image, and includes a character image of "activate by operating the effect button" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the message image MS1 is arranged in front of the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L, the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, although the oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the area on the right side of the variable area of the left production pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the left production pattern 8L and is not difficult to see. In addition, the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS1 straddles the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the left and right direction and overlaps the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the front and back direction, but the message image MS1 is the middle effect. The oblong rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the left side of the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, but the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the right effect symbol 8R. It is not obstructed by and does not become difficult to see.

A background image for the message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS1, and a text image of "activated by operating the production button" is arranged in front of the background image for the message image. there is The background image for the message image is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the text image "activated by operating the production button". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 is difficult to see through the background image for the message image. The background image for the message image may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it is an image that can improve the visibility of the character image "activated by operation of the effect button". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 can be visually recognized through the background image for the message image. Further, when the character image "activated by operating the effect button", which is the message image MS1, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the voice "activated by operating the effect button", which is the content of the character image, is played from the speaker 67. It's like As a result, the pressing operation of the effect button 63 can be prompted also by the sound.

After the message image MS1 is displayed for a predetermined period (15 seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS1 disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 48(H), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image "state 2" in the upper row is switched to the character image "production button", and the character image "waiting for activation" in the lower row is changed to "by operation". It is switched to a character image that says "activation". In the state display area JH, the character image "state 1" → the character image "state 2", the character image "waiting for activation" → the character image "effect button", and the character image "activated by operation" are repeatedly displayed in this order. be.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, the player performs a game of entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 (performing a game of so-called left-handed hitting), and the game does not hit and loses continuously. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

After that, in the change, as shown in FIG. 48(I), a state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3" is displayed. has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state display area JH continues to display "state 2" and "waiting for activation" on the display screen 7a. The state display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion effect state display image JM1 and the setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, a background image for state 3 (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of the background image for displaying state 3, a character image of "state 3 setting high" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence".

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, it gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "state 3 set high" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When moving toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moving to the state display area JH, the character image "state 3" is displayed in the upper part of the state display area JH, and "" is displayed in the lower part of the state display area JH. Standby for activation" are displayed separately in the upper and lower stages. In other words, the information "State 3" is reflected as it is in the text image "State 3 Set High Confidence", while the information "Set High Confidence" is switched to the information "Waiting for activation". there is

Here, at this point, although the right to change the state of the setting suggestion effect to "state 2" has already been obtained, the player has not pressed the effect button 63, so the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed to "state 2". It remains in state 1. For this reason, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the player is staying in "state 1" that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", and "state 3" and "waiting for activation" can be displayed in the state display area JH. By displaying the character image, it is possible to inform the player that the right to change the state of the setting suggestion effect to "state 3" has been obtained.

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 48(J), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the patterns of the same number are not aligned, and then stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the state display area JH continues to display the character images "state 3" and "waiting for activation" on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. At this time, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character image "state 3" and "waiting for activation" is switched to the character image "state 1".

Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 63 during the fluctuation, the effect of changing the state of the setting suggestion effect is activated, and as shown in FIG. A production button image BG (which may be an image simulating the production button 63 or may be a model simulating an old model of the production button 63) is displayed in a pressed state, and the production button image BG is displayed. A message image MS2 of "activation" having an effect image on the left side of is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the effect button 63 is pressed, the light normally flashes in white, but in this case, it flashes in green. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes green. After that, the effect button 63 is again lit in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it is lit in white. At this time, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character image "state 1" is switched to the character image "state 3", thereby changing the state of the setting suggestion effect to "state 3". In order to inform the player that it has changed and to be activated, and to emphasize the content displayed in the state display area JH (here, "state 3"), the state display area for the state display area JH The background image switches to the change activation background image. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the player is staying in "state 3" in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

In the state where this "state 3" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

If the player does not press the effect button 63, the above-described message image MS1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is again displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. ). After that, when the message image MS1 is displayed for a predetermined period (15 seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS1 disappears from the display screen 7a. In the state display area JH, the character image "state 1" → "state 3", the character image "waiting for activation" → the "effect button", and the character image "activated by operation" are displayed repeatedly in this order. becomes.

After that, in the variation, although not shown, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "0", and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "2". It is displayed and the failure is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C in order to start the next variable, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect, when the player acquires the right to change the state of the setting suggestion effect to "state 2", the player presses the effect button 63 at an arbitrary timing to change the setting suggestion effect. "State 2" can be activated by changing the state, and when the right to change the state of the setting suggestion effect to "State 3" is acquired, the effect button 63 is pressed at any timing. By doing so, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be changed and "state 3" can be activated.

48(B), (D), and (I) are determined in the state transition process shown in FIG. Based on this, it is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[State change effect V of setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the stop-displayed effect pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the upper side. Later (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, the opaque state is changed to half. It becomes a display mode that changes to a transparent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decoration pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). . In the state of the temporary stop display, the effect pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Briefly explaining the fluctuation icon and the pending icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, the second special figure reservation A second reserved display area is provided as. In the first pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, although not shown, pending icons 9B can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be displayed. can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

In addition, when the player is playing the game of entering the game ball into the first start hole 20 (when playing the game of so-called left-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 reservation display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd of the reservation icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, left-handed The pending icon 9B exists during the game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Also, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second starting port 21 (when playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first reservation display position 9Ad to the second reservation icon 9A of the reservation icon 9A is displayed. While the 4 pending display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the pending icon 9A is present when playing a game of right-handed hitting and is displayed on the display screen 7a until completion of digestion). Then, the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd of the holding icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The player performs a game of entering a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (performing a so-called left-handed game), and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a normal background image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

A state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and a character image of "state 1" is displayed in the state display area JH. ing. This is a setting suggestion effect state display image that can suggest (inform) the player that the setting suggestion effect state is "state 1" on a result screen to be described later after the previous winning game is completed. This is because JM1 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appeared) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

Specifically, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 1 setting normal" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. When the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the setting suggesting effect state display image JM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "state 1 setting normal". gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and "Status 1 setting" displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "state 1 normal setting", the information "state 1" is reflected as it is, but the information "normal setting" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" and stay in "state 1". there is

In the state where this "state 1" is staying, in the change from the change after the change (that is, the next change), the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting-suggestion effect. Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on any one of the set effect pattern 1 to the set effect pattern 7.例文帳に追加

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 49(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle effect symbol. 8C is in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display), and the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are aligned with the same number pattern (here, number "2") to form a reach.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the third When the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the state display area JH is also hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). ), a battle effect is started as shown in FIG. 49(C).

When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRB fights. Since the battle effect can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the battle effect is not started, the player has a high interest in the battle effect. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation, it is a win, and then a win game is started in which a profit is given to the player. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, the result is lost.

When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 49(D), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are again displayed on the display screen 7a, and the same patterns (here, numbers "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed at the same timing. Hit is confirmed. When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are again displayed on the display screen 7a and the same symbol (here, the number "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variation icon 9C and the variation display are further performed. The position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a.

When the win is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and then a win game is started in which a profit is given to the player. When the winning is confirmed, an announcement image AG1 of "right hitting" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the game of left hitting is switched to the game of right hitting, and the game ball is entered into the first big winning hole 30. The player is informed that the

When the winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 49(E), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and further, The variable display position 9Cd, all the reserved icons 9A, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the normal background image becomes a jackpot game image. The winning game background image (the winning game background image is a background image different from the normal background image) is switched to, and the upper body of the winged ally character CRA is largely displayed in front of the winning game background image.

When the winning game ends, as shown in FIG. 49(F), the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the announcement image AG1 of "Right shot" displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen. disappear from 7a. The result screen has a win count image RG1 (here, "win: 1 time") indicating the number of times the win game has been played in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and a player's number in the win game in the center of the display screen 7a. (here, "Total: XXXXXX", "XXXXXX" is the actual number of balls played, for example, "1350") is displayed. It has become so. When the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the winning game background image is switched to the result background image (the result background image is a background image different from the normal background image and also different from the winning game background image). .

At the timing when the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, a setting information suggestion icon SI having a coin shape that suggests setting information may be displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The setting information suggesting icon SI has a display mode in which the upper body of the teammate character image is three-dimensionally formed on the surface of the coin.

The setting information suggesting icon SI is an important image that suggests to the player that the setting information is equal to or higher than a predetermined setting, and is displayed when the setting information is setting 3 or higher, setting 4 or higher, or setting 5 or higher. . When the setting information suggesting icon SI is green, it is suggested to the player that the setting information is 3 or more, and when the setting information suggesting icon SI is red, it is suggested to the player that the setting information is 4 or more. When the setting information suggesting icon SI is purple, it suggests to the player that the setting information is set to 5 or more. In this embodiment, the setting information suggestion icon SI is red.

When the win count image RG1, the pitched pitch image RG2, and the setting information suggestion icon SI disappear from the result screen, as shown in FIG. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a with a horizontally long rectangular shape. . The state display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image of "state 3 setting high confidence" and is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. In addition, an announcement image AG2 of "left-handed" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, indicating that the game of right-handed is switched back to the left-handed, and that a game of entering a game ball into the first start hole 20 will be performed. is conveyed to the player.

In this embodiment, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, unless the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a. As a trigger, the state of setting suggestion production can be changed.

A state 3 display background image dedicated to state 3 (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner region of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. A character image of "Koshin" is arranged. The background image for displaying status 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the character image "status 3 set high confidence". As a result, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 3 display background image. The background image for displaying state 3 may be an opaque or translucent image as long as it is an image that can improve the visibility of the character image "state 3 set high confidence". In this case, the image displayed in the region of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 3 display background image.

When the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (three seconds in this embodiment), the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "state 3 setting high confidence". From 7a, the background image gradually becomes transparent and disappears, and the result background image is gradually switched to the normal background image again. At this time, the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears) again. At this point, the state display area JH is in a state where "state 1" is displayed. Then, when the character image "state 3 set high confidence" moves toward the state display area JH while reducing the character size (size) and finally moves to the state display area JH, The character image "state 1" is switched to the character image "state 3" and displayed. In other words, in the character image "state 3 set high confidence", the information "state 3" is reflected as it is, but the information "set high confidence" is not reflected. By displaying "state 3" in the state display area JH, the state of setting suggestion performance changes (jumps) from "state 1" to "state 3", and the stay in "state 3" is clearly indicated to the player. It is possible to do so.

In the state where this "state 3" is staying, the frequency of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" ( The setting-suggestion effect is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability of the setting-suggestion effect (reliability rate). Specifically, it is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Of the patterns 13, based on any one of the setting effect pattern 8 to the setting effect pattern 13, the setting suggesting effect is performed.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. Variation production (variation display) of the pattern is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested. Incidentally, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped. When the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In the setting suggestion effect state change effect V, the setting suggestion effect state is not displayed on the display screen 7a unless the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen. In other words, when the setting information suggestion icon SI, which is an important image for suggesting to the player that the setting information is equal to or greater than a predetermined setting, is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen, the setting suggestion effect is performed. changes (here, changes (jumps) from "state 1" to "state 3").

In the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect, the state display image of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. there is

In addition, in the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes thereafter. However, if the setting information suggesting icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a before the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, this may be used as a trigger to change the state of the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, in the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes thereafter. However, when the setting information suggesting icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a while the ending image that informs the player of the end of the winning game is being displayed on the display screen 7a in place of the result screen, the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a. Alternatively, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a before the ending image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the setting suggestion is triggered by this. The state of the production may change

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the state change effects T to V of the setting suggesting effects will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 47 and the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. In the lottery ("hit" or "losing" lottery) accompanying the ball entry), the setting information is referred to and the lottery is performed with the lottery probability according to the setting information. A setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect determination process in FIG. 24) for making a suggestion based on setting information can be executed, and there are a plurality of setting suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting suggestion effect are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestive production states. Based on the game time of the player, a transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestive effect states to the second state in which the setting suggestive effect can be an advantageous effect for the player compared to the first state (see FIG. 23). state transition processing) can be executed. By executing the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) based on the game time of the player, for example, in FIG. In FIG. 48(L), when the player presses the production button 63, the character image of "state 1" is switched to the character image of "state 3" in the state display area JH. In FIG. 49G, the result screen is changed from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 3 setting high confidence". According to this configuration, the transition processing from the first state of the setting suggesting effect states to the second state in which the setting suggesting effect is more advantageous to the player than the first state can be performed within the playing time of the player. Therefore, in addition to notifying the player of the winning or losing result of the lottery, the player can play the game to change from the first state to the second state. It is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of aiming to transition to a state. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. time) has passed, 20 minutes (predetermined time) have passed, 20 minutes (predetermined time) have passed, and 20 minutes (predetermined time) have passed, that is, transition processing ( 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed after the predetermined time of every 20 minutes has elapsed since the player started playing the game. It is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect according to the game time.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect state includes a setting normal state (state 1) in which the frequency of execution of the setting suggesting effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggesting effect is relatively low (state 1). The frequency of execution is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low Setting high probability state (state 2), and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low Includes four states: a high setting high confidence state (state 3) and a setting high confidence state (state 4) in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high. is configured as According to this configuration, by changing the state of the setting suggestion performance (setting suggestion performance state) to one of the states 1 to 4, the player aims at the setting high confidence state of state 4. A new game property can be given.

[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a performance button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player. 48(D), (E), (I), (J), and (L) in the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is the set high probability state (state 2) or in the case of transitioning to the set high reliability state (state 3), this transition can be executed triggered by pressing operation (operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means). In FIGS. 48(D) and (E), the state of setting suggestion effect does not change to "state 2" and remains "state 1", but the state of setting suggestion effect becomes "state 1". It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the player is staying in "state 1", and by displaying a character image of "state 2" and "waiting for activation" in the state display area JH, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed. The player can be informed that he/she has acquired the right to change to "state 2". In FIGS. 48(I) and (J), although the right to change the state of the setting suggestion effect to "state 2" has already been obtained, the player has not pressed the effect button 63, so the setting suggestion is not performed. The state of the presentation remains "state 1". For this reason, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the player is staying in "state 1" that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", and "state 3" and "waiting for activation" can be displayed in the state display area JH. By displaying the character image, it is possible to inform the player that the right to change the state of the setting suggestion effect to "state 3" has been obtained. In FIG. 48(L), when the player presses the effect button 63, the state display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character image "state 1" changes to the character image "state 3". By switching to , the player is notified that the state of the setting suggestion effect has changed to "state 3" and is activated, and the content displayed in the state display area JH (here, "state 3”), the background image for the state display area of the state display area JH is switched to the change activation background image. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the player is staying in "state 3" in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3". According to this configuration, when the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) transitions to the setting high-precision state (state 2) or the setting high-confidence state (state 3), this transition is performed by the production button 63 (operation means) Since it can be executed triggered by pressing operation (operation), when acquiring the right to transition to the setting high reliability state (state 2) or the setting high reliability state (state 3), the game can be activated at any time by the user. In addition, by pressing (operating) the effect button 63 (operating means) at any timing of the player, the setting high-precision state (state 2) or the setting high-confidence state (state 3) is activated. It can also be used as a fighting element that attracts hits to yourself.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 49, a lottery (“hit” or “ At the time of the lottery of "losing"), the setting information is referred to and the lottery is performed with the lottery probability according to the setting information. A setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect determination process in FIG. 24) for making a suggestion based on setting information can be executed, and there are a plurality of setting suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting suggestion effect are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestive production states. When the result of the lottery is a win and the result screen appears after the ending screen of the game state advantageous to the player, the setting suggestion performance is advantageous to the player compared to the first state from the first state among the setting suggestion performance states. It is possible to execute transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) for transitioning to a second state that can be an effect. In the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 49(G), when the result of the lottery is a win and the result screen appears after the ending screen of the game state advantageous to the player, transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23). can be executed. In the result screen, important information for the player such as the number-of-wins image RG1 and the ball-out image RG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Since the setting information is also important information for the player, an effect suggesting the setting information may be executed on the result screen. Therefore, by executing transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) on the result screen, it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect. According to this configuration, when the transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggesting effect states to the second state in which the setting suggesting effect is more advantageous to the player than the first state, when the result screen is obtained, Since it can be executed, in addition to informing the player of the winning or losing result of the lottery, the player can switch from the first state to the second state by playing the game. It is possible to provide the player with a new game property of aiming for a transition. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the state change effects T to V of the setting suggesting effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. Processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) can be executed. However, instead of the result screen, the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) may be executed on the ending screen of the game state that is advantageous for the player. Since the setting information is important information for the player, when the ending screen of the game state appears, an effect suggesting the setting information may be executed. Therefore, when the ending screen of the game state is displayed, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, whereby control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion effect. Further, when the game state ending screen or result screen is displayed, instead of executing the transition processing (the state transition processing in FIG. 23), transition occurs before and after the game state ending screen or result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. You may make it perform a process (state transition process of FIG. 23). Also in this case, control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion effect. In this way, when the ending screen or the result screen of the game state is displayed on the display screen 7a, since the setting information is important information for the player, an effect suggesting the setting information may be executed. Therefore, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed to change the state of the setting-suggestion effect, aiming at the timing when the ending screen or the result screen of the game state is displayed on the display screen 7a. You may do so.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, transition processing (state transition processing of FIG. 23 ), in the case of transitioning to the set high-precision state (state 2) or the set high-confidence state (state 3), wait until the timing of pressing (operating) the production button 63 (operation means) before performing this transition. I was able to do it. However, when the transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) confirms the transition to the setting high-precision state (state 2) and then the transition to the setting high-precision state (state 3) is confirmed, the setting high-precision state (state 2), it may be possible to make a transition to the set high-confidence state (state 3). Even if the setting high certainty state (state 2) or the setting high reliability state (state 3) is displayed alone on the display screen 7a, the player may not be able to narrow down the setting information candidates and may not be able to make a reliable judgment. . Therefore, first, after acquiring the first right to confirm the transition to the setting high-confidence state (state 2), if the second right to confirm the transition to the setting high-confidence state (state 3) is obtained, that is, When two rights are acquired (when the first right is acquired and then the second right is acquired), this triggers a transition to the set high confidence state (state 3). In this way, the player may be able to reliably make a determination by narrowing down the setting information candidates by transitioning to the setting high confidence state (state 3) after the setting high certainty state (state 2).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. ) has passed, 20 minutes (predetermined time) have passed, 20 minutes (predetermined time) have passed, and 20 minutes (predetermined time) have passed. 23 state transition processing) can be executed. However, instead of the lapse of a predetermined time of every 20 minutes from the start of the game by the player, a discharge device is provided at the most downstream side of the game board 2 to detect all the game balls hit into the game area 3. It may be the number of outs detected by the sensor 25 (number of outs). That is, the number of outs (the number of outs), which is the number of game balls launched into the game area 3, is a predetermined number (for example, 2000. Since about 100 game balls are launched into the game area 3 per minute, 2000 balls in 20 minutes.), transition processing (state transition processing in FIG. 23) may be executed. In this way, since the game time of the player can be known from the number of outs (the number of outs), it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effects T of the setting suggestion effects of FIGS. 47(B), (D), (F), (H) and (L), FIGS. In the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect of (I) and the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 49(G), the state display image of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the state display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played from the speaker 67 as a voice. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggesting effect is "state 1 normal setting". good too. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the state change (transition result) of the setting suggestion effect by voice.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It had been. At this time, the voice "exercise", which is the content of the message image MS2, may be played from the speaker 67. FIG. In this way, it is possible to inform the player that the effect of changing the state of the setting suggestion effect has been activated also by the sound.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. The setting-suggestion effect state (one of “state 1” to “state 4”) was displayed in the display area JH. However, instead of the image display device 7, the state of the setting suggesting effect may be displayed in the display area of another image display device provided on the game board 2, or the sub-display device provided on the door frame 53 may be displayed. The screen may display the state of the setting suggestion effect. The other image display device provided on the game board 2 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. For example, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decorative body 10 located at the lower right of the image display device 7, the image display device is provided in the center of this decorative member. The sub-display device is composed of a right sub-display device, a left sub-display device, and an upper sub-display device. The right sub-display device is provided on the right side of the front frame 53 , the left sub-display device is provided on the left side of the front frame 53 , and the upper sub-display device is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53 . The right sub-display device and the left sub-display device are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display device is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53 . The sub-display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The state of setting suggestion effect is displayed on one of the right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device, which constitute the sub-display device. As another image display device provided on the game board 2, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decoration body 10, a predetermined image is printed in advance instead of the image display device provided on the center decoration body 10. and a built-in backlight (plurality of light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. Thereby, a predetermined image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members on which a predetermined image is printed may be provided so that the predetermined image corresponding to the emitted color of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) may be displayed respectively. In this case, the predetermined images printed on the plurality of printing members are assumed to be different images. By doing this, the luminescent colors of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) can be, for example, red (first light emitting means), green (second light emitting means), blue (third light emitting means), white (fourth light emitting means). light emitting means), a predetermined image printed on the first printing member in red light when the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) emits red light (the first predetermined image "State 1 ”) is displayed, and a predetermined image printed on the second printing member in green light when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light (“state 2” which is a second predetermined image) is displayed. ) is displayed, and a predetermined image printed on the third printing member with blue light emission when the built-in backlight (third light emitting means) emits blue light (“state 3”, which is the third predetermined image) is displayed, and a predetermined image (“state 4”, which is a fourth predetermined image) printed on the fourth printing member in white light when the built-in backlight (fourth light emitting means) emits white light is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, by emitting light from the built-in backlight, it is possible to display the state of setting suggestion effect (one of "state 1" to "state 4") as a predetermined image. Of course, when the built-in backlight is turned off, the predetermined image is not displayed, so the state of the setting suggestion effect at this time (one of "state 1" to "state 4") is hidden.

[Modification 7]
47, the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 48, and the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect of FIG. A part may not be provided, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect 8-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
Based on the game time of the player, a transition process is performed for transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player as compared with the first state. is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-1,
When the player starts the game and a predetermined time elapses, the transition process is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 8-1 or aspect 8-2,
When the number of game balls launched into the game area reaches a predetermined number, the transition process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-3,
The setting suggestion effect state includes a setting normal state in which the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low, and a setting in which the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high. A set high certainty state in which the reliability of the suggestion effect is relatively low, a set high confidence state in which the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect Four states of a set high confidence state in which the frequency is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high are included.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-4,
Having an operation means that can be operated by a player,
The transition process waits until the timing when the operating means is operated when transitioning to the set high-confidence state or the set high-confidence state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-4,
When the transition process confirms the transition to the set high-confidence state after the transition to the set high-confidence state is confirmed, the transition to the set high-confidence state is performed without transitioning to the set high-confidence state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect 8-7]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
When the result of the lottery is a win and an ending screen of a game state advantageous to the player or a result screen after the ending screen of the game state is displayed, a comparison is made from the first state of the setting suggestive effect states to the first state. can execute a transition process for transitioning to a second state in which the setting suggestion effect can be an advantageous effect for the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 . In this case, the display effects described above may be executed by the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 7... Image display device 7a... Display screen 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (7)

A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting information when a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the game,
capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion based on the setting information;
having a plurality of setting-suggestion effect states in which settings relating to the setting-suggestion effect are different from each other;
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion effect states,
The plurality of setting-suggestion rendering states transition when a specific condition is established,
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The plurality of setting-suggestion effect states are different from each other in at least one of the setting-suggestion effect execution frequency and the setting-suggestion effect reliability.
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the setting suggestion production state,
a setting normal state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low;
a setting high certainty state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is relatively high;
contains four states of
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
capable of displaying a background image suggesting the setting suggesting production state;
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
capable of displaying an icon image suggesting the setting suggestion rendering state;
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
It is possible to display a production pattern in a manner suggesting the setting suggestion production state,
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
Capable of outputting music suggesting the setting suggestion production state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images